Hyundai 2006 Tiburon Owners Manual Gkflhma 11.p65

2015-09-08

: Hyundai Hyundai-2006-Tiburon-Owners-Manual-762650 hyundai-2006-tiburon-owners-manual-762650 hyundai pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 266 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

gkflhma-11 1.pdf
gkflhma-0.pdf
gkflhma-1a.pdf
gkflhma-1b.pdf
gkflhma-2.pdf
gkflhma-3.pdf
gkflhma-4.pdf
gkflhma-5.pdf
gkflhma-6.pdf
gkflhma-7.pdf
gkflhma-8.pdf
gkflhma-9.pdf
gkflhma-10.pdf
gkflhma-11 2.pdf

2006

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's specific

warranty coverage.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibility

to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.

When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.

Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A05F-AAT

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any

time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai Tiburon models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

HGK037

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety

or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.

Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation

and other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an

improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this

reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai

dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.

These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if

the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is

not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

A110A01A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systems that help to ensure

your vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that you expect. These systems utilize computers

to monitor the operation of various systems and components and help to control their operation. These

computerized system operations are wide-ranging and involve components to reduce emissions, to continuously

evaluate the readiness of the airbag and seat belt pretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag and seat

belt pre-tensioner systems should be deployed and then to activate the deployment, and if equipped, to operate

anti-lock braking, traction control and electrical stability control to assist the driver to control the vehicle in difficult

driving situations. These systems electronically store information that is useful to service technicians when they

need to diagnose and repair these systems. Additional information is stored only when a crash occurs that results

in the deployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of data storage is done by devices called

event data recorders(EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as the Supplemental

Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), may record some information about

the condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. This information consists of data related to seat belt

usage and if there was diagnostic information in the airbag or seat belt systems at the time that a crash occurred,

and if the ACU sensed that a crash of sufficient severity occurred to require seat belt pre-tensioner or airbag

deployment.

To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the

data is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or share it with others except:

o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, or

o with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, or

o as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, or

o as required by law.

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who

drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which

we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read

it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai

dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may

be required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave

the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not

meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-

tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear

in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor

Company.

A100A03A-AAT

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts

used by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-

facture vehicles. They are designed and

tested for the optimum safety, performance,

and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and

built to meet rigid manufacturing require-

ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or used

salvage parts is not covered under the

Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or

any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, any

damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai

Parts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part

is not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasing

Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on

the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the United

States are packaged with labels written only

in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through

authorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call

1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &

BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A02GK-AAT

B250A01GK-A

1. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch (If installed)

2. Panel Brightness Control Knob

(Rheostat Switch)

3. Multi-Function Light Switch

4. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

5. Front Fog Light switch (If installed)

6. Hazard Warning Switch

7. Digital Clock

8. Passenger's Air Bag

9. Glove Box

10.Hood Release Lever

11.Fuse Box Relay

12.Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If installed)

13.Horn and Driver's Airbag

14.Cruise Control Switch (If installed)

15.Heating and Cooling Controls

16.Ashtray

17.Cigarette Lighter

18.Shift Lever

19.Audio System (If installed)

20.Parking Brake Lever

21.Center Console

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor

on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,

instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto

these areas, wash them with water immediately.

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A02GK-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-38.

Malfunction Indicator Light

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If installed)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/ Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

CRUISE Indicator Light (If installed)

Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

CRUISE SET Indicator Light (If installed)

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator Lights (If installed)

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2

Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3

Keys.............................................................................. 1-3

Door (Teft-Alarm System) ...................................... 1-4, 1-6

Power Windows ............................................................ 1-9

Seats ........................................................................... 1-10

Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-16

Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-21

Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ..... 1-28

Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-36

Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-38

Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-47

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-49

Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-55

Mirror ........................................................................... 1-58

Hood Release ............................................................. 1-61

Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-67

Audio Remote Control Switch ..................................... 1-70

Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-71

Stereo Sound System ................................................. 1-88

Audio System.............................................................. 1-90

Antenna ..................................................................... 1-127

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:

Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty may not cover damage to the fuel

system and any performance problems that

are caused by the use of fuels containing

methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl

Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-

gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasoline

and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be used

in your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-

ops driveability problems, the use of 100%

unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels with

unspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcohols

other than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A02JM-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane

Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)

or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should

not be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuel

can reduce vehicle performance and damage

components of the fuel system.

B010A02GK

UNLEADED

FUEL ONLY

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containing

MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%

vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should not

be used in your Hyundai.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen

Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-

formance and produce vapor lock or hard

starting.

!WARNING:

o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-

matically shuts off when refueling.

o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwise

the " " light will illuminate.

o Always check that the fuel cap is in-

stalled securely to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

BREAKING IN YOUR NEW

HYUNDAI

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-

ommends that you use gasolines treated with

detergent additives, which help prevent deposit

formation in the engine. These gasolines will

help the engine run cleaner and enhance per-

formance of the Emission Control System.

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in another

country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-

tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required with

your new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-

ute to the economical operation and durability of

your Hyundai by observing the following recom-

mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000

km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).

o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000

rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start

quickly or depress the accelerator pedal

fully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoid

hard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don't

drive so slowly in too high a gear that the

engine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speed

from time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes

at one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles

(2,000 km) of operation.

KEYS

B030A01A-AAT

For greater convenience, the same key oper-

ates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,

because the doors can be locked without a key,

carrying a spare key is recommended in case

you accidentally lock one key inside the car.

B030A01E

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

WARNING:

o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if there

are children in the car), be sure that all the

doors are securely closed and locked so

that the doors cannot be inadvertently

opened from the inside. This helps en-

sure that the doors will not be opened

accidentally. Also, when combined with

the proper use of seat belts, locking the

doors helps keep occupants from being

ejected from the car in case of an acci-

dent.

o Before opening the door, always look for

and avoid oncoming traffic.

o In case of accident, the door is unlocked

automatically (If installed).

DOOR

B040A02Y-AAT

DOOR LOCKS

B030C01Y-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

(If installed)

Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switch

will be illuminated for your convenience, pro-

vided the ignition switch is not in the "ON"

position.

The light will go off approximately 10 seconds

after closing the door or when the ignition switch

is turned on.

B030C01E-1

B030B01S-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the key number

plate that came with the keys to your Hyundai.

This key number plate should be kept in a safe

place, not in the vehicle. The key number should

also be recorded in a place where it can be found

in an emergency.

If you need additional keys, or if you should lose

your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can

make new keys if you can supply the key

number.

B030B01E

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B040C01S-AAT

Locking From the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key.

To lock the doors first push the inside lock

switch to the "LOCK" position so that the red

mark on the switch is not visible, then close the

door.

NOTE:

o When locking the door this way, be care-

ful not to lock the door with the ignition

key left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chance of theft, always

remove the ignition key, close all win-

dows, and lock all doors when leaving

your vehicle unattended.

HGK2009

B040B01JM-AAT

Locking and unlocking front doors with a

key

o The door can be locked or unlocked with a

key.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward the

front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the

key toward the rear.

NOTE:

The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-

ing the key once toward the rear. If you wish

to unlock all doors, turn the key again

toward the rear within 4 seconds.

The passenger's side will lock or unlock all

doors with just one rotation.

HGK2008

LOCK

UNLOCK

B040D01S-AAT

Locking From the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simply close

the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"

position. When this is done, neither the outside

nor the inside door handle can be used.

NOTE:

When the door is locked, the red mark on the

switch is not visible.

HGK2010

UNLOCK

LOCK

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B070B02GK-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the

system as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition

switch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood and tail gate

are closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the

keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turn

signal light will blink once to indicate that the

system is armed.

HGK2009

B040G02GK-GAT

Central Door Lock

The central door locking is operated by pushing

the driver's door lock switch toward the front or

rear of the vehicle. If the passenger door is open

when the switch is pushed, the door will remain

locked when closed.

NOTE:

o When pushing the switch toward the

rear, all doors will unlock.

When pushing the switch toward the

front, all doors will lock.

o When the door is unlocked, the red mark

on the switch is visible.

o The central door locking is operated by

turning the key (driver's door only) to-

ward the front or rear of the vehicle.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

This system is designed to provide protection

from unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-

tem is operated in three stages: the first is the

"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,

and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-

gered, the system provides an audible alarm

with blinking of the turn signal light.

o If the door is locked/unlocked multiple

times in rapid succession with either the

vehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-

tem may stop operating temporarily in

order to protect the circuit and prevent

damage to system components.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

NOTE:

1) If any door, tail gate or engine hood

remains open, the system will not be

armed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system as

described above.

3) Once the system is armed, only the tail

gate may be unlocked using the key

without disarming the system.

CAUTION:

Do not arm the system until all passengers

have left the car. If the system is armed while

a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm

may be activated when the remaining

passenger(s) leaves the car.

B070C01GK-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the following

occur while the car is parked and the system is

armed.

1) A front door is unlocked and opened without

using the transmitter.

2) The tail gate is opened without using the key.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the turn signal lamp will

blink continuously for 30 seconds. (This hap-

pens 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock the

door with the transmitter.

CAUTION:

Avoid trying to start the engine while the

system is armed.

B070D04GK-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed when either of the

following steps are taken:

1) The driver's or passenger's door is un-

locked by depressing the "UNLOCK" button

on the transmitter.

2) In the middle of alarming or after alarming, it

keeps for 30 seconds when the key is turned

to the "ON" position.

After completing one of steps above, the turn

signal light will blink twice to indicate that the

system is disarmed.

NOTE:

If any door, tail gate or engine hood is not

opened within 30 seconds, the system will

be rearmed.

HGK102

LOCK

UNLOCK

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B070F02A-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user's authority to

operate the equipment.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.

2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.

3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal

lights will blink once to indicate that the

system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.

2. At the same time all doors unlock, the turn

signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the

system is disarmed.

NOTE:

The transmitter will not work if any of fol-

lowing occur:

- The ignition key is in ignition switch.

- You exceed the operating distance limit

(10 m).

- The battery in the transmitter is weak.

- Other vehicles or objects may be block-

ing the signal.

- The weather is extremely cold.

- The transmitter is close to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work cor-

rectly, open and close the door with the

ignition key. If you have a problem with the

transmitter, contact an authorized Hyundai

Dealer.

NOTE:

Keep the transmitter away from water or

any liquid. If the keyless entry system is

inoperative due to exposure to water or

liquids, it will not be covered by your manu-

facturer vehicle warranty.

B075E01O-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the transmitter.

2. At the same time, the siren will sound and the

turn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"

button again on the transmitter.

HGK102

PANIC

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B070E02GK-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to get

weak, it may take several pushes on the button

to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not

light. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2016

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a blade

screwdriver as shown in the illustration.

HGK122

Screwdriver

2. Remove the old battery from the case and

note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of

the new battery is the same(+side facing up),

then insert it in the transmitter.

NOTE:

Install a new battery within 30 seconds after

removing the old one. If installing a new

battery takes more than 30 seconds, take

the following steps.

1) Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" posi-

tion.

2) Make sure that the turn signal lamps

blink once by pushing the "LOCK" or

"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.

HGK121

Battery

POWER WINDOW

B050A01GK-AAT

The power windows operate only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. The main

switches are located on the driver's arm rest

and control the front windows on the respective

sides of the vehicle. The windows may be

opened by depressing the front portion of the

switch. To stop at the desired opening, release

the switch. The window may be closed by pulling

the front portion of the switch. In order to prevent

operation of the passenger front window by the

passenger, a window lock switch (1) is provided

on the arm rest of the driver's door. To disable

the passenger's power window, push the win-

dow lock switch. To revert to normal operation,

push in on the window lock switch again.

HGK2015

(1)

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Auto-Down Window (Driver's Side)

(If Installed)

The Auto-Down window is moved to its fully

open position by pushing the switch. To stop at

the desired position push in on the switch again.

B050A02GK

HGK2016

WARNING:

(1) Be careful that someone's head, hands

and body are not trapped by a closing

window.

(2) Never try to operate the main switch on

the driver's door and the individual door

window switch in opposing directions

at the same time. If this is done, the

window will stop and cannot be opened

or closed.

(3) Do not leave children alone in the car.

Always remove the ignition key for their

safety.

SEATS

B080A02A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

!WARNING:

o Never adjust the driver’s seat while the

vehicle is moving. Any sudden or unex-

pected movement of the seat could cause

you to lose control of the vehicle result-

ing in an accident. Only adjust the

driver’s seat when the vehicle is station-

ary.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the airbag. Position the seat so that you

can sit as far back as possible from the

airbag and still comfortably reach all

controls.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B080B03A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pull

the lock release lever upward. This will release

the seat on its track so you can move it forward

or rearward to the desired position. When you

find the position you want, release the lever and

slide the seat forward or rearward on its track

until it locks into the desired position and cannot

be moved further.

HGK2027

WARNING:

After adjusting the seat, always check that

it is securely locked into place by attempt-

ing to move the seat forward or reverse

without using the lock release lever. Sud-

den or unexpected movement of the driver's

seat could cause you to lose control of the

vehicle resulting in an accident.

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to take

your weight off it, then pull up on the recliner

control lever at the outside edge of the seat. Now

lean back until the desired seatback angle is

achieved. To lock the seatback into position,

release the recliner control lever.

HGK2028

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B080D01JM

o For maximum effectiveness in case of an

accident the headrest should be ad-

justed so the middle of the headrest is at

the same height as the top of the

occupant's eyes. For this reason, the

use of a cushion that holds the body

away from the seatback is not recom-

mended.

o Do not operate vehicle with the head-

rests removed as injury to the occupants

may occur in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protection against

neck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest hejght while

the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING:

!WARNING:

Riding with a reclined seatback increases

your chance of serious or fatal injuries in

the event of a collision or sudden stop. The

protection of your restraint system (seat

belts and airbags) is greatly reduced by

reclining your seat. Seat belts must be snug

against your hips and chest to work prop-

erly. The more the seatback is reclined, the

greater the chance that an occupant's hips

will slide under the lap belt or the occupant's

neck will strike the shoulder belt. Drivers

and passengers should always sit well back

in their seats, properly belted, and with the

seatbacks upright.

B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk

of neck injuries.

To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower the

headrest, push it down while pressing the lock

knob. To remove the headrest, raise it as far as

it can go then press the lock knob while pulling

upward. This should only be done when the seat

is not occupied.

Lock Knob

HGK2032

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B080F01F-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment

(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To raise or lower the front part of the seat

cushion, turn the knob forward or rearward.

HGK2029

B080E01F-AAT

Lumbar Support Control

(Driver's seat only)

The driver's seat is equipped with adjustable

lumbar support.

To increase the amount of lumbar support, pull

the lever forward.

To decrease it, push the lever toward the rear.

SOFT

HGK2030

FIRM

B129A01F-AAT

REAR SEAT POSITIONS

WARNING:

This vehicle contains two rear seating po-

sitions only and a seat belt for each seating

position. Thus, never permit more than two

occupants to ride in the rear seat because

an unrestrained occupant could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of a

vehicle crash.

B129A01GK

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B099A01F-AAT

BEFORE FOLDING THE REAR SEATS

In order to prevent the shoulder belt from being

damaged while folding the rear seat, the shoul-

der belt must be passed through the hanger to

keep it out of the way.

CAUTION:

Seat belts must be removed from the hanger

when in use.

HGK2034

B130A01GK-AAT

REAR SEAT ENTRY (Walk in device)

The driver and front passenger's seatbacks

should be tilted to enter the rear seat.

By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at the

left-upper side of the driver side seatback, the

seatback will tilt forward. Then pull the lock

release lever (2) up to move the seat forward.

HGK2036

(1)

(2)

By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at the

right-upper side of the passenger side seatback,

the seatback will tilt forward. Then push the seat

forward to allow the occupants to enter.

Recliner Memory

By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) the

seatback is reclined and returned to the original

position.

WARNING:

Don't drive with the passenger side seatback

reclined. It is dangerous to move it while

driving. Be sure the seatback is caterred

firmly before driving.

HGK2036-1

(1)

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

!WARNING:

The purpose of the fold-down rear

seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer

objects than could otherwise be accommo-

dated. Never allow passengers to sit on top

of the folded down seat back while the car

is moving as this is not a proper seating

position and no seat belts are available for

use. This could result in injury in case of an

accident or sudden stop. Objects carried

on the folded down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of the front

seats. This could allow cargo to slide for-

ward and cause injury or damage during

sudden stops.

B110A02S-AAT

FOLDING REAR SEATBACKS

The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate

carrying long items or to increase the luggage

capacity of the vehicle.

o To unlock the seatback, push the seatback

locking button, then pull forward on the

seatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to its upright

position, always be sure it has locked into

position by pulling and pushing on the top of

the seatback.

HGK2035

B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage or

other cargo should not be piled higher than the

top of the seatback. In addition, do not place

objects on the rear shelf as they may move

forward during braking or in an accident and

strike vehicle passengers.

B140A01GK

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraint

systems should always occupy the rear seat

and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap

portion should be fastened snug on the hips and

as low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt out of posi-

tion. Children are afforded the most safety in the

event of an accident when they are restrained

by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If

a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in

the front seat, the child should be securely

restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and

the seat should be placed in the rearmost

position. Children under the age of 13 should be

restrained securely in the rear seat. Never

place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.

NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front

seat of a vehicle.

for your child's height and weight. Check

the label on the child restraint for this

information. See page 1-21.

B150B04Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. You

should be aware of the specific requirements in

your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must

be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.

Information about the use of these restraints

begins on page 1-21.

WARNING:

Every person in your vehicle needs to be

properly restrained at all times, including

infants and children. Never hold a child in

your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle.

The violent forces created during a crash

will tear the child from your arms and throw

the child against the interior. Always use a

child restraint appropriate for your child's

height and weight, see page 1-21.

NOTE:

Small children are best protected from in-

jury in an accident when properly restrained

in the rear seat by a child restraint system

that meets the requirements of the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before

buying any child restraint system, make

sure that it has a label certifying that it

meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213. The restraint must be appropriate

SEAT BELT

B150A02S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:

All occupants of the vehicle must wear their

seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child

restraints reduce the risk of serious or fatal

injuries for all occupants in the event of a

collision or sudden stop. Without a seat

belt, occupants could be shifted too close

to a deploying airbag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the vehicle.

Properly worn seat belts greatly reduce

these hazards. Even with advanced airbags,

unbelted occupants can be severely in-

jured by a deploying airbag. Always follow

the precautions about seat belts, airbags

and occupant safety contained in this

manual.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B150G02A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of

an accident and to achieve maximum effective-

ness of the restraint system, all passengers

should be sitting up and the front seats should

be in an upright position when the car is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-tion if

the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the

front seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:

Riding with a reclined seatback increases

your chance of serious or fatal injuries in

the event of a collision or sudden stop. The

protection of your restraint system (seat

belts and airbags) is greatly reduced by

reclining your seat. Seat belts must be snug

against your hips and chest to work prop-

erly. The more the seatback is reclined, the

greater the chance that an occupant's hips

will slide under the lap belt causing serious

internal injuries or the occupant's neck

could strike the shoulder belt. Drivers and

passengers should always sit well back in

their seats, properly belted (see page 1-19),

and with the seatbacks upright.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended for

pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury

in an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lap

belt portion should be placed as low and snugly

as possible on the hips, not across the abdo-

men. For specific recommendations, consult a

physician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injured

person is being transported. When this is nec-

essary, you should consult a physician for

recommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should never

attempt to use a single seat belt. This could

increase the severity of injuries in case of an

accident.

B160A02A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled

or modified. In addition, care should be taken to

assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not

damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:

When you return the rear seatback to its

upright position after the rear seatback was

folded down, be careful not to damage the

seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that

the webbing or buckle does not get caught

or pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt with

damaged webbing or buckle will not be as

strong and could possibly fail during a

collision or sudden stop, resulting in seri-

ous injury.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-

spected periodically for wear or damage of any

kind. Parts of the system that are damaged

should be replaced as soon as possible.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Release the button to lock the anchor into

position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make

sure that it has locked into the position.

WARNING:

o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is locked

into position at the appropriate height.

Never position the shoulder belt across

your neck or face. Improperly posi-

tioned seat belts can cause serious inju-

ries in an accident.

o Failure to replace seat belts after an

accident could leave you with damaged

seat belts that will not provide protec-

tion in the event of another collision

leading to personal injury or death.

Replace your seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts

become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a

mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,

strong detergents or abrasives should not be

used because they may damage and weaken

the fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies

should be replaced if the vehicle has been

involved in an accident. This should be done

even if no damage is visible. Additional ques-

tions concerning seat belt operation should be

directed to your Hyundai Dealer.

B170A04A-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT

SHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt

anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum

comfort and safety.

If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near

your neck, you will not be getting the most

effective protection. The shoulder portion should

be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and

midway over your shoulder nearest the door

and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,

lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-

priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull

it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the

height adjuster button.

HGK2038

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B190A02Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS -Front Passenger and Rear

Seat 3-Point System with Combination

Locking Retractor

To Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-

stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-

modate the installation of child restraint sys-

tems. Hyundai strongly recommends that chil-

dren always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER

place any infant restraint system in the front

seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the features of

both an emergency locking retractor seat belt

and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To

fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor

and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There

will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into

the buckle.

NOTE:

Seat belt reminder light comes and stays on

until the seat belt is fastened when the

ignition key is turned "ON" or "START".

And, the warning chime will also sound for

about 6 seconds.

B180A01L-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System with

Emergency Locking Retractor:

To Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor

and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There

will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into

the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper

length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted

manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.

If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the

belt will extend and let you move around. If there

is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will

lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean

forward too quickly. Check to make sure that

the belt is properly locked and that the belt is not

twisted.

B180A01L

When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt

operates in the same way as the driver's seat

belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It

automatically adjusts to the proper length only

after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is

adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around

your hips. When the seat belt is fully extended

from the retractor to allow the installation of a

child restraint system, the seat belt operation

changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to

extend. (Automatic Locking Retractor Type)

see page 1-25.

NOTE:

Although the combination retractor pro-

vides the same level of protection for seated

passengers in either emergency or auto-

matic locking modes, it is recommended

that seated passengers use the emergency

locking feature for improved convenience.

The automatic locking function is intended

to facilitate child restraint installation. To

convert from the automatic locking feature

to the emergency locking operation mode,

allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-

tract.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-

lease button in the locking buckle. When it is

released, the belt should automatically draw

back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure

it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01L

!WARNING:

o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, seat belts must always be used

whenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective when

seatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children age 12 and younger must al-

ways be properly restrained in the rear

seat. Never allow children to ride in the

front passenger seat. If a child over 13

must be seated in the front seat, he/she

must be properly belted and the seat

should be moved as far back as possible.

o Never wear the shoulder belt under your

arm or behind your back. An improperly

positioned shoulder belt can cause se-

rious injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned midway over

your shoulder across your collarbone.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A

twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a

collision, it could even cut into you. Be

sure the belt webbing is straight and not

twisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-

bing or hardware. If the belt webbing or

hardware is damaged, replace it.

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

WARNING:

You should place the lap belt portion as low

as possible and snugly across your hips,

not on your waist. If the lap belt is located

too high on your waist, it may increase the

chance of injury in the event of a collision.

Both arms should not be under or over the

belt. Rather, one should be over and the

other under, as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm

nearest the door.

B200A01L

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

!WARNING:

o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child or

infant seat on the front passenger's seat.

Should an accident occur and cause the

passenger side airbag to deploy, it could

severely injure or kill an infant or child

seated in an infant or child seat. Thus

only use a child restraint in the rear seat

of your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint system

can become very hot if it is left in a closed

vehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-

side temperature does not feel hot. Be

sure to check the seat cover and buckles

before placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not in

use, store it in the trunk or fasten it with

a safety belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden stop or

an accident.

o Children may be seriously injured or

killed by an inflating airbag. All children,

even those too large for child restraints,

must ride in the rear seat.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A04A-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rear

seat and must always be properly restrained to

minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden

stop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-

dent statistics provided by the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),

children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger

children not in a child restraint should use one

of the seat belts provided.

All 50 states have child restraint laws. You

should be aware of the specific requirements in

your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must

be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.

You must use a commercially available child

restraint system that meets the requirements of

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS).

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if

their restraints are not properly secured. For

small children and babies, a child seat or infant

seat must be used. Before buying a particular

child restraint system, make sure it fits your car

and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the

instructions provided by the manufacturer when

installing the child restraint system.

To reduce the chance or serious or fatal

injuries:

o Children of all ages are safer when re-

strained in the rear seat. A child riding in

the front passenger seat can be force-

fully struck by an inflating airbag result-

ing in serious or fatal injuries.

o Always follow the instructions for in-

stallation and use of the child restraint

maker.

o Always make sure the child seat is se-

cured properly in the car and your child

is securely restrained in the child seat.

o Never hold a child in your arms or lap

when riding in a vehicle. The violent

forces created during a crash will tear the

child from your arms and throw the child

against the car’s interior.

o Never put a seat belt over yourself and a

child. During a crash, the belt could

press deep into the child causing seri-

ous internal injuries.

o Never leave children unattended in a

vehicle – not even for a short time. The

car can heat up very quickly, resulting in

serious injuries to children inside. Even

very young children may inadvertently

cause the vehicle to move, entangle them-

selves in the windows, or lock them-

selves or others inside the vehicle.

WARNING:

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

o Never allow two children, or any two

persons, to use the same seat belt.

o Children often squirm and reposition

themselves improperly. Never let a child

ride with the shoulder belt under their

arm or behind their back. Always prop-

erly position and secure children in rear

seat.

o Never allow a child to stand-up or kneel

on the seat or floorboard of a moving

vehicle. During a collision or sudden

stop, the child can be violently thrown

against the vehicles interior, resulting in

serious injury.

o Never use an infant carrier or a child

safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback,

it may not provide adequate security in

an accident.

o Seat belts can become very hot, espe-

cially when the car is parked in direct

sunlight. Always check seat belt buck-

les before fastening them over a child.

o Always store or secure a child seat, even

when it is not in use. During a collision

or sudden stop, the child seat could be

thrown inside the vehicle.

WARNING:

B230B02GK-GAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use of a child

seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or

infant seat should be of appropriate size for the

child and should be installed in accordance with

the manufacturer's instructions. It is further

required that the seat be placed in the vehicle's

rear seat since this can make an important

contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided

with two child restraint hook holders for insta

lling the child seat or infant seat.

B230C05F-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the

"Tether Anchorage" System

Two child restraint hook holders are located on

the luggage compartment floor.

To install the child restraint seat

B230E02GK

Tether Anchor Cover Child Restraint

Hook Holder

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rear

luggage compartment floor.

2. Route the child restraint seat strap over the

seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route

the tether strap under the headrest and

between the headrest posts, otherwise route

the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B230D03GK-AAT

Securing the child Restraint seat with

the "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make child

restraint seats that are labeled as ISOFIX or

ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seats. These

seats include two rigid or webbing mounted

attachments that connect to two ISOFIX an-

chors at specific seating positions in your ve-

hicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates

the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat

for forward-facing child restraint seats.

ISOFIX anchors have been provided in your

vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in the

left and right outboard rear seating positions.

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

B230F01GK

WARNING:

o A child can be seriously injured or killed

in a collision if the child restraint is not

properly anchored. Always follow the

child seat manufacturer’s instructions

for installation and use.

o Never mount more than one child re-

straint to a single tether or to a single

lower anchorage point. The increased

load caused by multiple seats may cause

the tethers or anchorage points to break,

causing serious injury or death.

B230E01GK

Covering shelf

Front of Vehicle

Tether strap hook

Blanking covers

Rear luggage compartment floor

3. Remove the blanking covers on the cover-

ing shelf.

4. Connect the tether strap hook to the child

restraint hook holder through the hole on the

covering shelf and tighten to secure the seat.

Child Restraint

Hook Holders

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

!WARNING:

o There is no center rear seat position.

o A child can be seriously injured or killed

in a collision if the child restraint is not

properly anchored. Always follow the

child seat manufacturer’s instructions

for installation and use.

o Never install a child restraint using the

ISOFIX anchors at the center position of

the rear seat. In a crash, the ISOFIX

anchors may break if a car seat is improp-

erly placed in the center position result-

ing in serious or fatal injuries. Only place

a ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seat

in the left or right out-board rear seating

positions (as shown) to the appropriate

ISOFIX anchors provided.

o Never mount more than one child re-

straint to a single tether or to a single

lower anchorage point. The increased

load caused by multiple seats may cause

the tethers or anchorage points to break,

causing serious injury or death.

o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX” sys-

tem to install a child restraint system in

the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat

belt metal latch plates or tabs must be

latched securely in their seat belt buck-

les and the seat belt webbing must be

retracted behind the child restraint to

prevent the child from reaching and tak-

ing hold of unretracted seat belts.

Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may

allow the child to reach the unretracted

seat belts which may result in strangu-

lation and a serious injury or death to the

child in the child restraint.

The ISOFIX anchors are located between the

seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat

left and right outboard seating positions.

B230D02GK

ISOFIX Anchor ISOFIX Anchor

Position Indicator

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HGK261

B230G02O-AAT

Child Restraint System Installation on

outboard Rear Seats

To install a child restraint system in the outboard

rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely

from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This will

engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking

feature, which allows the seat belt to retract but

not extend. Install the child restraint system,

buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to

take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion

of the belt is tight around the child restraint

system and the shoulder portion of the belt is

positioned so that it can not interfere with the

child's head or neck. Also, double check to be

sure that the retractor has engaged the auto-

matic locking feature by trying to extend web-

bing out of the retractor.

On outboard rear seats

HGK1010

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-

tions to properly install child restraint seats with

ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-

straint, assure that the seat is properly attached

to the ISOFIX and tether anchors. Also, test the

child restraint seat before you place the child in

it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug

the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors

hold the seat in place.

WARNING:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in

a collision if the child restraint is not prop-

erly anchored to the car and the child is not

properly restrained in the child restraint.

Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B180B04GK-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (If Installed)

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's

and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.

The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make

sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the

occupant's body in certain frontal collisions.

The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated

alone or, where the frontal collision is severe

enough, together with the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the

occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the

seat belt retractor will lock into position. In

certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will

activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact

against the occupant's body.

HXG229

!WARNING:

o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint can

move when your vehicle turns or stops

suddenly. A child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the child restraint is not

properly anchored to the car, including

setting the retractor to the Automatic

Locking mode.

o Do not install any child restraint system

in the front passenger seat. Should an

accident occur and cause the passenger

side airbag to deploy, it could severely

injure or kill an infant or child seated in

an infant or child seat. Therefore, only

use a child restraint system in the rear

seat of your vehicle.

If the retractor is in the automatic locking mode,

the belt will be locked. After installation of the

child restraint system, try to move it in all

directions to be sure the child restraint system

is securely installed. If you need to tighten the

belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor.

When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to

retract, the retractor will automatically revert

back to its normal seated passenger emer-

gency locking usage condition.

NOTE:

o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read the

instructions supplied by the child re-

straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-

scribed, have the system checked imme-

diately by your authorized Hyundai

dealer.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists

mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light

2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

Driver's airbag

B180B01GK

Passenger's

airbag

1!WARNING:

To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-

tensioner seat belt:

o The seatbelt must be work correctly and

adjusted to the proper position (see

pages 1-18). Please read and follow all of

the important information and precau-

tions about your vehicle’s occupant

safety features – including seat belts –

that are provided in this manual.

o Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear them properly.

NOTE:

o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated

in certain frontal collisions. The pre-

tensioner seat belts can be activated

alone or, where the frontal collision is

severe enough, together with the

airbags.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are

activated, a loud noise may be heard and

fine dust, which may appear to be smoke,

may be visible in the passenger com-

partment. These are normal operating

conditions and are not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should not

be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash

all exposed skin areas thoroughly after

an accident in which the pre-tensioner

seat belts were activated.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

28 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

(AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

B240A03GK-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with a Supplemental

Restraint (Airbag) System. The indications of

the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIR

BAG" embossed on the ornament in the steer-

ing wheel and the passenger's side front panel

pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed

under the pad covers in the center of the

steering wheel and the passenger's side front

panel above the glove box. The purpose of the

SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the

front passenger with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt system alone, in

case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

B240A01GK

Driver's Airbag

!WARNING:

o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-

tensioner seat belts must be replaced.

All seat belts, of any type, should always

be replaced after they have been worn

during a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly

mechanisms become hot during activa-

tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat

belt assemblies for several minutes after

they have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace the

pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This

must be done by an authorized Hyundai

dealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt

assemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair the

pre-tensioner seat belt system in any

manner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed

the warnings to not strike, modify, in-

spect, replace, service or repair the pre-

tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead

to improper operation or inadvertent

activation and serious injury.

o Always wear seat belts when driving or

riding in a motor vehicle.

CAUTION:

o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag

is connected with the pre-tensioner seat

belts. The SRS airbag warning light on

the instrument panel will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds after the igni-

tion key has been turned to the "ON"

position, and then it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-

ing properly, this warning light will illu-

minate even if there is no malfunction of

the SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbag

warning light does not illuminate when

the ignition key is turned to "ON" or if it

remains illuminated after approximately

6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the

vehicle is being driven, please have an

authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the

pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbag

system as soon as possible.

AIR

BAG

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

NOTE:

o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the front

of the sun visor and in the glove box.

o If you are considering modification of

your vehicle due to a disability, please

contact the Hyundai Customer Assis-

tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

WARNING:

Always use seat belts and child restraints –

every trip, every time, everyone! Airbags

inflate with considerable force and in the

blink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain maxi-

mum benefit from the airbag. Always fol-

low the precautions about seat belts, airbags

and occupant safety contained in this

manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or fatal

injuries and receive the maximum safety

benefit from your restraint system:

o Never place a child in any child or booster

seat in the front seat (see child restraints

1-21).

o ABC – Always Buckle Children in the

back seat. It is the safest place for

children of any age to ride

o Front and side impact airbags can injure

occupants improperly positioned in the

front seats

o The SRS is designed to deploy the

airbags only when an impact is suffi-

ciently severe and when the impact angle

is less than 30° from the forward longi-

tudinal axis of the vehicle and will not

deploy in side, rear or rollover impacts.

Additionally, the airbags will only de-

ploy once. Thus, seat belts must be worn

at all times.

o Front airbags are not intended to deploy

in light collisions in which protection

can be provided by the seat belt alone.

WARNING:

Rear impact

B240A02GK

Side Impact Rollover

!WARNING:

o Move your seat as far back as practical

from the front airbags, while still main-

taining control of the vehicle.

o Never sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the front or side airbags

o Never lean against the door or center

console – always sit in an upright posi-

tion

o Never place objects over or near any

airbag module (front or side impact

airbags), because these objects can in-

jure passengers in a crash

o Never place covers, blankets or after-

market seat warmers on the passenger

seat as these may interfere with the

occupant classification system

o Do not tamper or disconnect SRS wiring

or other components. Injuries could

result from inadvertent deployment or

failure of the airbag to deploy in a crash.

o If the SRS airbag warning light (see pg 1-

40) remains illuminated while the vehicle

is being driven, have an authorized

Hyundai dealer inspect the airbag sys-

tem as soon as possible.

o Airbags can only be used once – have an

authorized Hyundai dealer replace the

airbag immediately after deployment.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B240B04GK-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

- Driver's Airbag Module

- Passenger's Airbag Module

- Knee Bolster

- SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors all elements

while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal

or near-frontal impact is severe enough to

require airbag deployment.

B240B01L

o Front airbags are not intended to deploy

in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover

crashes. In addition, airbags will not

deploy in frontal crashes below the de-

ployment threshold speed.

o Move your seat as far back as practical

from the front airbags, while still main-

taining control of the vehicle. You and

your passengers should never sit or lean

unnecessarily close to the airbags. Im-

properly positioned drivers and passen-

gers can be severely injured by inflating

airbags.

o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steering

wheel, instrument panel, and the front

passenger's panel above the glove box,

because any such object could cause

harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe

enough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-

placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

Deployed airbags WILL NOT inflate again

and will provide no protection in subse-

quent collisions.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS

wiring, or other components of the SRS

system. Doing so could result in injury,

due to accidental firing of the airbags or

by rendering the SRS inoperative.

!WARNING: !

o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position. A

child restraint system must never be

placed in the front seat. The infant or

child could be severely injured or killed

by an airbag deployment in case of an

accident.

o Do not allow children to ride in the front

passengrer seat. If older children (teen-

agers and older) must ride in the front

seat, make sure they are always properly

belted and that the seat is moved back as

far as possible.

o For maximum safety protection in all

types of crashes, all occupants includ-

ing the driver should always wear their

seat belts whether or not an airbag is

also provided at their seating position to

minimize the risk of severe injury or

death in the event of a crash. Do not sit

or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag

while the vehicle is in motion.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy very

rapidly to provide protection in a crash.

If an occupant is out of position because

of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may

forcefully contact the occupant causing

serious or fatal injuries.

WARNING:

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

A fully inflated airbag in combination with a

properly worn seat belt slows the driver's or the

passenger's forward motion, thus reducing the

risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediately

starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain

forward visibility.

B240B03L

B240B02L

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on

the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6

seconds after the ignition key is turned to the

"ON" position or after the engine is started, after

which the SRI should go out.

The airbag modules are located both in the

center of the steering wheel and in the front

passenger's panel above the glove box. When

the SRSCM detects a considerable impact to

the front of the vehicle, it will automatically

deploy the airbags.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly

into the pad covers will separate under pres-

sure from the expansion of the airbags. Further

opening of the covers then allows full inflation of

the airbags.

Passanger's Airbag

B240B01GK

!CAUTION:

Do not install or place any accessories

(drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc)

on the front passenger's panel above the

glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air

bag. Such objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if the

passenger's air bag inflates.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B990B05Y-AAT

Side Impact Airbag (If installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact

airbag in each front seat. The purpose of the

airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or

the front passenger with additional protection

than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side

impact airbags are designed to deploy only

during certain side-impact collisions, depend-

ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and point

of impact. The side impact airbags are not

designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02Y

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air

freshener inside a vehicle, do not place it

near the instrument cluster nor on the in-

strument panel pad surface. If there is any

leakage from the air freshener onto these

areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel

pad or air ventilator), it may damage these

parts. If the liquid from the air freshener

does leak onto these areas, wash them with

water immediately.

B240B05L

WARNING:

o If an airbag deploys, there may be a loud

noise followed by a fine dust released in

the vehicle. These conditions are nor-

mal and are not hazardous - the airbags

are packed in this fine powder. The dust

generated during airbag deployment

may cause skin or eye irritation as well as

aggravate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly with lukewarm water and a mild

soap after an accident in which the

airbags were deployed.

o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the

SRS SRI does not illuminute, or contin-

uously remains on after illuminating for

about 6 seconds when the ignition key

is turned to the "ON" position, or after

the engine is started, illuminates while

driving, the SRS is not working properly.

If this occurs, have your vehicle immedi-

ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnect

a battery terminal, turn the ignition key

to the "LOCK" position or remove the

ignition key. Never remove or replace the

air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition

key is in the "ON" position. Failure to

heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI

to illuminate.

Passanger's Airbag

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.

o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.

o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and the

front seat. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause injury

if the supplemental side impact airbag

inflates.

o To prevent unexpected deployment of

the side impact airbag that may result in

personal injury,avoid impact to the side

airbag sensor when the ignition key is

on.

WARNING:

!WARNING:

o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seat

belt systems and is not a substitute for

them. Therefore your seat belts must be

worn at all times while the vehicle is in

motion. The airbags deploy only in cer-

tain side impact conditions severe

enough to cause significant injury to the

vehicle occupants.

o For best protection from the side impact

airbag system and to avoid being injured

by the deploying side impact airbag,

both front seat occupants should sit in

an upright position with the seat belt

properly fastened. The driver's hands

should be placed on the steering wheel

at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.

The passenger's arms and hands should

be placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.

o Use of seat covers could prevent or

reduce the effectiveness of the system.

B240C04A-AAT

SRS Care

o The SRS is virtually maintenance free and

there are no parts you can safely service by

yourself. If the SRS SRI (Service Reminder

Indicator) does not illuminate, or continu-

ously remains on, have your vehicle imme-

diately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Any work on the SRS system, such as

removing, installing, repairing, or any work

on the steering wheel must be performed by

a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper

handling of the airbag system may result in

serious personal injury.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

o If your car was flooded and has soaked

carpeting or water on the floor, you

shouldn't try to start the engine; have

the car towed to an authorized Hyundai

dealer.

WARNING:

!WARNING:

o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position. A

child restraint system must never be

placed in the front seat. The infant or

child could be severely injured or killed

by an airbag deployment in case of an

accident.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-

ing, including the addition of any kind of

badges to the pad covers or modifica-

tions to the body structure, can ad-

versely affect SRS performance and lead

to possible injury.

B240C01HP

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use

only a soft, dry cloth or one which has

been moistened with plain water. Sol-

vents or cleaners could adversely affect

the airbag covers and proper deploy-

ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steering

wheel, instrument panel, and the front

passenger’s panel above the glove box,

because any such object could cause

harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe

enough to cause the airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-

placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS

wiring, or other components of the SRS

system. Doing so could result in injury,

due to accidental inflation of the airbags

or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system must

be discarded, or if the vehicle must be

scrapped, certain safety precautions

must be observed. Your Hyundai dealer

knows these precautions and can give

you the necessary information. Failure

to follow these precautions and proce-

dures could increase the risk of personal

injury.

WARNING:

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B240D02JM-AAT

Additional Safety Precautions

oNever let passengers ride in the cargo

area (trunk) or on top of a folded-down

back seat. All occupants should sit upright,

fully back in their seats with their seat belts

on and their feet on the floor.

oPassengers should not move out of or

change seats while the vehicle is mov-

ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seat

belt during a crash or emergency stop can

be thrown against the inside of the vehicle,

against other occupants, or out of the ve-

hicle.

oEach seat belt is designed to restrain one

occupant. If more than one person uses the

same seat belt, they could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

oDo not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve occu-

pant comfort or reposition the seat belt can

reduce the protection provided by the seat

belt and increase the chance of serious

injury in a crash.

oPassengers should not place hard or

sharp objects between themselves and

the airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objects

on your lap or in your mouth can result in

injuries if an airbag inflates.

oKeep occupants away from the airbag

covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully

back in their seats with their seat belts on and

their feet on the floor. If occupants are too

close to the airbag covers, they could be

injured if the airbags inflate.

oDo not attach or place objects on or near

the airbag covers. Any object attached to

or placed on the front or side impact airbag

covers could interfere with the proper opera-

tion of the airbags.

oDo not modify the front seats. Modifica-

tion of the front seats could interfere with the

operation of the supplemental restraint sys-

tem sensing components or side impact

airbags.

oDo not place items under the front seats.

Placing items under the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the supple-

mental restraint system sensing compo-

nents and wiring harnesses.

oNever hold an infant or child on your lap.

The infant or child could be seriously injured

or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and

children should be properly restrained in

appropriate child safety seats or seat belts

in the rear seat.

WARNING:

o Sitting improperly or out of position can

cause occupants to be shifted too close

to a deploying airbag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the vehicle

resulting in serious injury or death.

o Always sit upright with the seatback in

an upright position, centered on the

seat cushion with your seat belt on, legs

comfortably extended and your feet on

the floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing your

vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or

side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect

the operation of your vehicle's airbag system.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

36 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A02GK-AAT

B260A02GK-A

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1. Speedometer

2. Turn Signal Indicator Light

3. Odometer

4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)

5. Coolant Temperature Gauge

6. Trip odometer

7. Fuel Gauge

8. Tachometer

9. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light (If installed)

10. Trip Odometer Reset Knob

11. Charging System Warning Light

12. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Service Reminder

Indicator (SRI)

13. Seat Belt Warning Light

14. High Beam Indicator Light

15. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

16. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

17. Low Fuel Warning Light

18. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

19. CRUISE Indicator Light (If installed)

20. CRUISE SET Indicator Light (If installed)

21. Tail Gate Open Warning Light

22. Door Ajar Warning Light

23. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If installed)

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:

If the oil pressure warning light stays on

while the engine is running, serious engine

damage may result. The oil pressure warn-

ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-

ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it

should come on when the ignition switch

is turned on, then go out when the engine

is started. If the oil pressure warning light

stays on while the engine is running, there

is a serious malfunction.

If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is

safe to do so, turn off the engine and check

the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the

engine oil to the proper level and start the

engine again. If the light stays on with the

engine running, turn the engine off imme-

diately. In any instance where the oil light

stays on when the engine is running, the

engine should be checked by a Hyundai

dealer before the car is driven again.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service Reminder Indica-

tor (SRI) (If Installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the

Anti-Lock Brake System SRI will come on and

then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRI

remains on, comes on while driving, or does not

come on when the key is turned to the "ON"

position, this indicates that there may be a

problem with the ABS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by

your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The

normal braking system will still be operational,

but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake

system.

WARNING:

If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/

Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"

or come on while driving, there may be a

problem with E.B.D (Electronic Brake Force

Distribution).

If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have

your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer

as soon as possible.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrument

panel show the direction indicated by the turn

signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,

blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not

illuminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signal

system is indicated. Your dealer should be

consulted for repairs.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-

ever the headlights are switched to the high

beam or flash position.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B260H01GK-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid

Level Warning Light

CAUITON:

If you suspect brake trouble, have your

brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as

soon as possible. Driving your car with a

problem in either the brake electrical sys-

tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-

ous, and could result in a serious injury or

death.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/low brake fluid level warning

light should come on when the parking brake is

applied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"

or "START". After the engine is started, the light

should go out in three seconds.

If the parking brake is not applied, the warning

light should come on when the ignition switch is

turned to "ON" or "START", then go out in three

seconds. If the light comes on at any other time,

you should slow the vehicle and bring it to a

complete stop in a safe location off the roadway.

The brake fluid level warning light indicates that

the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder

is low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming to

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be

added. After adding fluid, if no other trouble is

found, the car should be immediately and care-

fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.

If further trouble is experienced, the vehicle

should not be driven at all but taken to a dealer

by a professional towing service.

Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal

braking systems. This means you still have

braking on two wheels even if one of the dual

systems should fail. With only one of the dual

systems working, more than normal pedal travel

and greater pedal pressure are required to stop

the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a

distance with only half of the brake system

working. If the brakes fail while you are driving,

shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking

and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

B260J01A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should come

on when the ignition is turned on, then go out

when the engine is running. If the light stays on

while the engine is running, there is a malfunc-

tion in the electrical charging system. If the light

comes on while you are driving, stop, turn off the

engine and check under the hood. First, make

certain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,

check the tension of the belt. Do this as shown

on page 6-23 by pushing down on the center of

the belt. Have the system checked by your

Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B260E01L-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Light And

Chime

Seat belt reminder light comes and stays on until

the seat belt is fastened when the ignition key is

turned "ON" or "START".

And, the warning chime will also sound for about

6 seconds.

B260K01F-AAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the tail gate is

completely closed and latched.

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on when

the fuel tank is approaching empty. When it

comes on, you should add fuel as soon as

possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light

on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the

engine to misfire and damage the catalytic

converter.

B260L02HP-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light and

Chime (If Installed)

The door ajar warning light warns you that a door

is not completely closed and the chime warns

you that the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTE :

The warning chime only sounds whenever

the key is in the ignition switch and the

driver's side front door is open simulta-

neously. The chime sounds until the key is

removed from the ignition switch or the

driver's side front door is closed.

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Service

Reminder Indicator (SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes

on for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is

turned to the "ON" position or after the engine

is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is not

working properly. If the SRI does not come on,

or continuously remains on after coming on for

about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition

key to the "ON" position or started the engine,

or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS

inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260N02A-AAT

Malfunction Indicator

Light

This light illuminates when there is a malfunction

of an exhaust gas related component, and the

system is not functioning properly so that the

exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.

This light will also illuminate when the ignition key

is turned to the "ON" position, and then it will go

out in a few seconds after the engine is started.

If it illuminates while driving, or does not illumi-

nate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON"

position, take your car to your nearest autho-

rized Hyundai dealer and have the system

checked.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B260Q01E-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light

(If Installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-

ter is illuminated when the cruise control main

switch on the end of the barrel is pushed.

The indicator light does not illuminate when the

cruise control main switch is pushed a second

time.

Information about the use of cruise control is

beginning on page 1-63.

B270A01A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front disc brake pads have wear indicators

that should make a high-pitched squealing or

scraping noise when new pads are needed. The

sound may come and go or be heard all the time

when the vehicle is moving. It may also be heard

when the brake pedal is pushed down firmly.

Excessive rotor damage will result if the worn

pads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealer

immediately.

B260R01E-GAT

CRUISE SET Indicator Light

(If installed)

The set indicator light in the instrument cluster

is illuminated when the cruise control switch is

pushed downward to "SET (COAST)".

The set indicator light does not illuminate when

the control switch is in the "CANCEL" position.

B265C01LZ-AAT

Electronic Stability

Program Indicator Lights

(If installed)

The electronic stability program indicators

change operation according to the ignition switch

position and whether the system is in operation

or not.

They will illuminate when the ignition key is

turned to the "ON" position, but should go out

after three seconds. If the ESP or ESP-OFF

indicator stays on, take your car to your autho-

rized Hyundai dealer and have the system

checked. See section 2 for more information

about the ESP.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B290A02A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

WARNING:

Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. The engine coolant is under

pressure and could erupt and cause severe

burns. Wait until the engine is cool before

removing the radiator cap.

The needle on the engine coolant temperature

gauge should stay in the normal range. If it

moves across the dial to "H" (Hot), pull over and

stop as soon as possible and turn off the engine.

Then open the hood and after the engine has

cooled, check the coolant level and the water

pump drive belt. If you suspect cooling system

trouble, have your cooling system checked by

a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated in

miles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-

ters per hour (on the inner scale).

HGK2060

HGK2058A

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-

mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity

is given in Section 9.

HGK2059

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B330A03E-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of your

engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

B330A01GK

CAUTION:

The engine should not be raced to such a

speed that the needle enters the red zone

on the tachometer face. This can cause

severe engine damage and may void your

warranty.

B310B01GK-AAT

Odometer/Trip odometer

Function of digital odometer/trip odom-

eter

Pushing in the reset switch on the right side of

speedometer when the ignition switch is turned

"ON" will display the following sequence:

HGK028B

Type A

Type B

HGK2061-1

HGK055C

Type A

Type B

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distance

in miles, and is useful for keeping a record for

maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Any alteration of the odometer may void

your warranty coverage.

2,3 Trip odometer

Records the distance of 2 trips in miles.

TRIP A: Distance you have traveled from your

origination point to a first destination.

TRIP B: Distance from the first destination to the

final destination.

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the reset

switch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset

to 0.

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B02GK-GAT

(If installed)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-

trolled driver information gauge that displays

information related to driving, such as estimated

distance to empty, average speed and drive

time on the LCD.

Reset Switch

o The reset switch is used to zero the multi-

functional display mode.

o Pushing in the reset switch on the left side of

tacometer changes the display as follows;

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE SPEED

DRIVE TIME

B400B01GK-E

Type A

Type B

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1. Distance to Empty

o This mode provides the estimated distance

to empty from the current fuel level in the fuel

tank.

o The trip computer may not register additional

fuel if less than 6 liters of fuel are added to the

vehicle.

o When the battery has been reinstalled after

being discharged or disconnected, drive

more than 32km for an accurate distance to

empty.

HGK2063

Type A

Type B

NOTE:

o When the distance to empty is less than

50 km, the symbol will always come on

and the distance to empty digits will

indicate "---" with flash until more fuel

is added.

o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according to driving

conditions.

o The distance to empty can vary accord-

ing to the driving conditions, driving

pattern or vehicle speed.

B400B02GK-E

Type A

Type B

2. AVERAGE SPEED

o This mode indicates the average speed

travelled since the last average speed reset.

o To reset the average speed to zero, press

and hold the reset switch for more than 1

second while the average speed is being

displayed.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

46 MULTI GAUGE

B330C01GK-GAT

(If installed)

Multi gauge is consists of torque gauge, instan-

taneous fuel consumption gauge and volt gauge.

B330C01GK

Torque gauge

It shows instantaneous change of the torque by

rpm.

Instantaneous fuel Consumption gauge

It shows instantaneous fuel consumption ac-

cording to the driving condition. The more indi-

cated figure is low, the more it indicates efficient

driving situation.

B330C04GK

3. DRIVE TIME

o This mode indicates the drive time travelled

since the last drive time reset.

o To reset the drive time to zero, press and

hold the reset switch for more than 1 second

while the drive time is being displayed.

HGK2065

Type A

Type B

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Volt gauge

It shows moment volt change and makes for

diver correspond to low volt situation.

B330C03GK

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,

HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM

SWITCH

Turn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turn

signals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushing

upwards on the lever causes the turn signals on

the right side of the car to blink. As the turn is

completed, the lever will automatically return to

the center position and turn off the turn signals

at the same time. If either turn signal indicator

light blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on but

does not blink, or does not go on at all, there is

a malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-

out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to a point where it begins flashing.

The lever will automatically return to the center

position when released.

HGK2079

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Parking light auto cut

o The purpose of this feature is to prevent the

battery from being discharged. The system

automatically turns off the small light when

the driver removes the ignition key and

opens the driver- side door.

o With this feature, the parklight will be turned

off automatically if the driver parks on the

side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on when the

ignition key is removed, perform the following :

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON again using

the light switch on the steering column.

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, push the

lever forward (away from you). The high beam

indicator light will come on at the same time. For

low beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340G01LZ-GAT

Auto Light (If installed)

To operate the automatic light feature, turn the

barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If

you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", the

tail lights and headlights will be turned automati-

cally on or off according to external illumination.

NOTE:

Switch on car light manually in foggy, cloudy

and rainy conditions.

HGK2075

B340C04E-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on the

end of the multi-function switch. The first posi-

tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, tail

lights and instrument panel lights. The second

position turns on the headlights.

NOTE:

The ignition must be in the "ON" position

to turn on the headlight.

HGK2074

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch lever

toward you, then release it. The headlights can

be flashed even though the headlight switch is

in the "OFF" position.

HGK2077

NOTE:

o Never place anything over sensor lo-

cated on the instrument panel, this will

ensure better auto light system control.

o Don't clean the sensor using a window

cleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint or other

types of coating on the front windshield,

the AUTO light system may not work

properly.

B340G01GK

Auto Light Sensor

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-

tions:

(1) Intermittent wiper operation

(2) Low-speed operation

(3) High-speed operation

NOTE:

To prevent damage to the wiper system, do

not attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-

tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snow

and ice should be removed manually. If

there is only a light layer of snow or ice,

operate the heater in the defrost mode to

melt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

HGK042A

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B350B01O-AAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/

washer lever toward the steering wheel. When

the washer lever is operated, the wipers auto-

matically make two passes across the wind-

shield. The washer continues to operate until

the lever is released.

NOTE:

o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluid

reservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the

wiper blades are not frozen to the glass

prior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,

use windshield washer antifreeze.

HGK044A

B350C01S-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the

wiper switch in the "INT" position. With the

switch in this position, the interval between

wipes can be varied from 2 to 10 seconds by

turning the interval adjuster barrel.

HGK043A

HGK045A

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired in mist, move the

windshield wiper and washer control lever up.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B390A01E-AAT

Rear Window Wiper And Washer Switch

1. : The rear window wiper starts to oper-

ate three times after the washer fluid

sprays onto the rear window.

2.OFF

3.INT : The interval between wipes operates

every 5 seconds intermittently.

4.ON : The rear window wiper starts to oper-

ate continuously.

5. : The washer fluid will be sprayed onto

the rear window and the wiper operates

while the rear window wiper barrel is

placed in this position.

HGK046A

Do not operate the washer continuously for

more than 15 seconds or when the fluid reser-

voir is empty; this could damage the system. Do

not operate the wiper when the window is dry;

this can result in scratching as well as prema-

ture wiper blade wear.

For the reason stated above,do not operate the

washer when the washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360A04A-AAT

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.

They will light when the headlight switch is in the

second position and the ignition key is in the

"ON" position.

NOTE:

If you turn on the headlight high beams, the

front fog lights will be turned off.

B360B01GK-A

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

52 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

SWITCH

HGK2090-1

B380A02A-AAT

The rear window defroster and heated outside

rearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in the

switch. To turn the defroster off, push the switch

a second time. The rear window defroster

automatically turns itself off after about 15 min-

utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in the

switch again after it has turned itself off.

NOTE:

The ignition must be running for the rear

window defroster to operate.

CAUTION:

Do not clean the inner side of the rear

window glass with an abrasive type of glass

cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign

deposits from the inner surface of the glass

as this may cause damage to the defroster

elements.

Type A

Type B

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be used

whenever you find it necessary to stop the car

in a hazardous location. When you must make

such an emergency stop, always pull off the

road as far as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on by

pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all

turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning

lights will operate even though the key is not in

the ignition.

To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the

switch a second time.

B370A01GK

Type A Type B Type C

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

CIGARETTE LIGHTERINSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT

CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be made brighter

or dimmer by turning the instrument panel light

control knob.

HGK2150

B420A02A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key must

be in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way

into its socket. When the element has heated,

the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. This

can damage the heating element and create a

fire hazard.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,

use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or its

approved equivalent.

HGK2118

DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT

There are three control buttons for the digital

clock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-

cated.

MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indi-

cated.

RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to

facilitate resetting the clock to the

correct time. When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29

changes the readout to 11 : 00.

Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29

changes the readout to 12 : 00.

HGK143A

!CAUTION:

Do not use electric accessories or equip-

ment other than the Hyundai genuine parts

in the socket.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

54 DRINK HOLDER

B450A02GK-AAT

(If Installed)

The drink holder is used for holding cups or

cans.

To use the passenger's drink holder, push the

drink holder.

HGK2123

WARNING:

o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is very hot

can injure you or your passengers. Spilled

liquids can damage interior trim and

electrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups or

cans in the drink holder. Such objects

can be thrown out in the event of a

sudden stop or an accident, possibly

injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

ASHTRAY

B430A01GK-AAT

The front ashtray may be opened by pushing

and releasing the ashtray door at its top edge.

To remove the ashtray in order to clean it, the

metal ash receptacle should be lifted out from

the ashtray door. Do not attempt to remove the

entire ashtray door assembly or damage will

result. To reinstall it, place it in the proper

position and press it down in the ashtray door.

The ashtray lamp will only illuminate when the

exterior body lights are switched on.

HGK2120

Driver's Passenger's

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

!WARNING:

o Do not close a sunroof if anyone’s hands,

arms or body are between the sliding

glass and the sunroof sash, as this could

result in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of the

sunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, always keep

the head, hands and other parts of the

body of all occupants away from the roof

opening. Otherwise, you could be seri-

ously injured if the vehicle stops sud-

denly or if the vehicle is involved in an

accident.

CAUTION:

o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperature or when it is covered with

ice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that may

have accumulated on the guide rails.

SUNROOF

B460A01S-AAT

(If Installed)

The sunroof can be operated with the ignition

key in the "ON" position.

SUNSHADE

B470A01S-AAT

(If Installed)

The sunshade can be opened and closed by

sliding it forward or rearward when the sunroof

is closed. The sunshade will open automatically

when the sunroof is opened, but it must be

closed manually.

HGK2026

WARNING:

Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

B460B03GK-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be electrically opened or closed

with the ignition key in the "ON" position. The

sunroof is moved to its fully open position by

pushing the " " switch, and to stop at the desired

position, push in any switches ( , , Up, Down).

To close, press and hold the " " button.

Release the button when the sunroof reaches

the desired position.

HGK2022

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided

with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench

can be found in the vehicle’s trunk or glove

box.

3. Push and turn the wrench clockwise to close

or counterclockwise to open the sunroof.

HGK2025

B460C01S-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be tilted by pushing the "UP"

button with the sunroof closed. Release the

button when the sunroof reaches the desired

position. To close the sunroof, press the

"DOWN" button.

NOTE:

After washing the car or after there is rain,

be sure to wipe off any water that is on the

sunroof before operating it.

HGK2023

B460D03GK-AAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

1. Remove the cap located in the rear roof

panel by using a coin or screw driver.

HGK2024

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HGK2087

B460E03GK-GAT

Resetting the Sunroof System

If the battery has been recharged, discon-

nected or is manually with operating the hex-

agonal head wrench, you may need to reset the

sunroof.

To do this;

1. Turn the ignition switch "OFF".

2. With pressing " " "up" button at the same

time, turn the ignition switch "ON".

The resetting is failed when the ignition

key to the "OFF" within 1.5 seconds.

3. If the sunroof is set like this, the sunroof is

reset with tilting up/down automatically once

for all.

CAUTION:

If the sunroof is not reset, it may not operate

normally.

INTERIOR LIGHT

B480A01GK-GAT

MAP LIGHT

(1) Push in the map light switch to turn on the

driver side light.

(2) In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-

tesy light comes on when any door is

opened regardless of the ignition key posi-

tion. The light goes out gradually 6 seconds

after the door is closed.

(3) Push in the map light switch to turn on the

driver side light.

(1) (2)

(3)

SUNGLASS HOLDER

B491A02F-AAT

The sunglass holder is located on the front

overhead console.

Push the end of the cover to open or close the

sunglass holder.

HGK2122

WARNING:

o Do not keep objects except sunglass

inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-

jects can be thrown from the holder in

the event of a sudden stop or an acci-

dent, possibly injuring the passengers

in the vehicle.

o Do not open the sunglass holder while

the vehicle is moving. The rear view

mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by

an open sunglass holder.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2. Next, adjust the mirror angle by depressing

the appropriate perimeter switch as illus-

trated.

CAUTION:

o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.

o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To remove

any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or

approved deicer.

WARNING:

Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the passenger

side rear view mirror. It is a convex mirror

with a curved surface. Any objects seen in

this mirror are closer than they appear.

GLOVE BOX MIRROR

B510B01A-AAT

OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

Electric Type

HGK2053

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted

to your preferred rear vision, both directly be-

hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left and

right sides.

The remote control outside rearview mirror

switch controls the adjustments for both the

right and left outside mirror.

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left

to activate the adjustable mechanism for the

corresponding door mirror.

B500A01A-AAT

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of

an accident or a sudden stop, the glove box

door should be kept closed when the car is

in motion.

HGK2121

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove box

release lever.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR VIEW

MIRROR

B510D01Y-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER

(If Installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated

in connection with the rear window defroster. To

heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in

the switch for the rear window defroster. The

rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-

ing or defogging and will give you improved rear

vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the

switch again to turn the heater off. The outside

rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself

off after 15 minutes.

HGK2090-1

Type A

Type B

B510C01A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR VIEW

MIRRORS

To fold the outside rear view mirrors, push them

toward the rear.

The outside rear view mirrors can be folded

rearward for parking in narrow areas.

HGK2055

WARNING:

Do not adjust or fold the outside rear view

mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control, and an acci-

dent which could cause death, serious in-

jury or death.

B520A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside

rear view mirror. The "night" position is selected

by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirror

toward you. In the "night" position, the glare of

headlights of cars behind you is reduced.

HGK2052

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

60 PARKING BRAKE

B530A03A-EAT

The parking brake must always be set when the

vehicle is to be left unattended. When the parking

brake is applied, and the ignition key is at the "ON"

position, the parking brake warning lamp will be

illuminated. Before driving the vehicle, the parking

brake must be fully released and the warning lamp

extinguished.

o To engage the parking brake, first apply the

foot brake and then without pressing the

release button in, pull the parking brake lever

up as far as possible.

In addition it is recommended that when

parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift

lever should be positioned in the appropriate

low gear on manual transmission vehicles or

in the Park position on automatic transmis-

sion vehicles.

HGK3019

B520B02O-GAT

(Electric type) (If installed)

The electric type day/night inside rearview mir-

ror automatically controls the glare of headlights

of the car behind you.

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-

dimming function OFF which is indicated by

the green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-

dimming function ON which is indicated by

the green Status Indicator LED turning on.

NOTE:

The mirror defaults to the "ON" position

each time the vehicle is started.

HLZ2068-1

!WARNING:

Whenever leaving vehicle or parking always

set the parking brake as far as possible and

fully engage the vehicle's transaxle into the

park position. Vehicles not fully engaged in

park with the parking brake set are at risk for

moving inadvertently and injuring yourself

or others.

o To release the parking brake, first apply the

foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever

slightly. Secondly, depress the release but-

ton and lower the parking brake lever whilst

holding the button.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01S-GAT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights

on either side of the car, the high mounted rear

stoplight in the center of the rear window or

inserted in the rear spoiler also lights when the

brakes are applied.

B550A02GK

Type A Type B Type C

FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING

LIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front door is

opened. The purpose of this light is to assist

when you get in or out and also to warn passing

vehicles.

B620A01GK

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01GK-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

HGK2019

HGK2020

Hood Release Lever

2. Press the safety hook lever up and lift the

hood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

NOTE:

If the fuel-filler lid will not open because ice

has formed around it, tap lightly or push on

the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do

not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around

the lid with an approved deicer fluid (do not

use radiator anti-freeze) or move the ve-

hicle to a warm place and allow the ice to

melt.

HGK2018Q

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID

RELEASE

B560A03JM-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside the

vehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid opener

located on the front floor area on the left side of

the vehicle.

HGK2017

When closing the hood, slowly close the hood

and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING:

o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before driving

away. If it is not latched, the hood could

open while the vehicle is being driven,

causing a total loss of visibility, which

might result in an accident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hood

in the raised position, as vision is ob-

structed and the hood could fall or be

damaged.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

WARNING:

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Before

refueling, always stop the engine and

never smoke or allow sparks and open

flames near the filler area.

o Never operate your vehicle without a

filler cap properly installed, flammable

vapors and gasoline could leak out in

dangerous situations such as a collision

or rollover. If the filler cap must be

replaced, only use genuine Hyundai re-

placement parts.

o After refueling, make sure the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel spill-

age in the event of an accident

o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwise

the " " light will illuminate

o If you open the fuel filler cap during high

ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-

sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-

mal and not a cause for concern.

Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,

turn it slowly.

o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-

matically shuts off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-

sive materials. When refueling, please

note the following guidelines carefully.

!- Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel

filler cap, have one's hands in contact

with metal parts away from the filler

neck to discharge static electricity.

- Do not get back in the vehicle while

refueling. Do not operate anything that

can produce static electricity. Static

electricity discharge can ignite fuel

vapors resulting in an explosion.

- When using a portable fuel container,

be sure to place the container on the

ground while refueling. Static electric-

ity discharge from the container can

ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. While

starting refueling, contact should be

maintained until the filling is complete.

- Do not use cellular phones around a

gas station. The electric current or elec-

tronic interference from cellular phones

can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

- When refueling, always turn the engine

off. Sparks by engine compartment

electrical equipment can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire. After refueling,

check to make sure the fuel filler cap is

securely closed, and then start the

engine.

- Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes

around a gas station. Automotive fuels

are flammable.

TAIL GATE

B540A01F-AAT

Remote Tail Gate Release

To open the tail gate without using the key, pull

up the lid release lever located on the driver's

door panel.

To close, lower the tail gate, then press down on

it until it locks. To be sure the tail gate is securely

fastened, always try to pull it up again.

HGK2012

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B540D01GK-GAT

when you close the tailgate

HGK1034

HGK227

B540C01F-AAT

To Unlock Using the Key

To open the tail gate, insert the key and turn it

clockwise to unlock. The tail gate compartment

light illuminates when the tail gate is opened.

HGK2011

!WARNING:

The tail gate should always be kept com-

pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.

If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust

gases may enter the car resulting in serious

illness or death to the occupants. See addi-

tional warnings concerning exhaust gases

on page 2-2.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

!WARNING:

Do not close an open tailgate (rear hatch)

while a person(s) is sitting upright on the

rear seat. The tailgate or tailgate glass may

contact the head of a person sitting upright

on the rear seat. Closing the tailgate onto a

person's head may cause serious injuries,

including death.

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

B600A01HP-AAT

(If installed)

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock.

2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.

3. After adjustment, release the lever.

WARNING:

Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel

while driving as this may result in loss of

control of the vehicle and serious injury or

death.

HGK2049

B580A02A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to give

the driver and front passenger either frontal or

sideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut out

direct rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.

A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sun

visor for the front passenger.

NOTE:

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

label containing useful information can be

found on the front of each sun visor.

Vanity mirror

HGK2119

SUN VISOR

WARNING:

Do not place the sun visor in such a manner

that it obscures visibility of the roadway,

traffic or other objects.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B990A03Y-AAT

Floor Mat Anchor

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,

make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor in

your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from

sliding forward.

HGK129

LUGGAGE NET

B540D02HP-GAT

(if installed)

Some objects can be kept in the net in the

luggage compartment.

Use the luggage net on the floor(If installed) or

at the back of the luggage compartment to

prevent objects from sliding.

WARNING:

Avoid eye injury. Do not overstretch. Al-

ways keep face and body out of recoil path.

Do not use when strap has visible signs of

wear or damage.

HGK2126

Type B

CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the goods or the

vehicle, care should be taken when carrying

fragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-

partment.

Type A

HORN

Working Zone

B610A01S-GAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound the

horn.

HGK2050

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

!WARNING:

o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips

and interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it may cause an

accident.

o Don't put an additional floor mat on the

top of the anchored mat, otherwise the

additional mat may slide forward and

interfere with the movement of the ped-

als.

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A02S-AAT

(If Installed)

The cruise control system provides automatic

speed control for your comfort when driving on

freeways, tollroads, or other noncongested

highways. This system is designed to function

above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

NOTE:

Cruise control is not recommended for city

driving, winding roads, slippery roads,

heavy rain, or other bad weather condi-

tions.

B660A01GK

B660B01GK-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push in the cruise control main switch on the

end of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicator

light in the instrument cluster will be illumi-

nated. This turns the system on.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed

above 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the control switch downward to "SET

(COAST)" and release it.

The "SET" indicator light in the instrument

cluster will illuminate.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal

and the desired speed will automatically be

maintained.

B660B01GK

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B660D01E-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

The vehicle will automatically resume the speed

set prior to cancellation when you push the

control switch upward to "RESUME (ACCEL)"

position and release it, providing the vehicle

speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660D01GK

B660C01GK-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control system, pull the

control switch toward the steering wheel to

"CANCEL" position.

Additionally, the following actions will disengage

the system :

o Depress the brake pedal.

o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).

o Shift the selector lever to "N" position (Auto-

matic transaxle).

o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the

memorized speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).

o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25

mph (40 km/h).

o Release the main switch.

B660C01GK

5. To momently increase speed, depress the

accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to

exceed the preset speed. When you remove

your foot from the accelerator pedal, the

vehicle will return to the speed you have set.

WARNING:

To avoid accidental cruise control engage-

ment, keep the cruise control main switch

off when not using the cruise control.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B660E01E-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch upward to "RE-

SUME (ACCEL)" position and hold it.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the

control switch. While the control switch is

held, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

B660F03E-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control switch downward to "SET

(COAST)" and hold it. The vehicle will decel-

erate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, release

the control switch. While the control switch

is pushed, the vehicle speed will gradually

decrease.

B660B01GK

!! WARNING:

o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off when not using the cruise control to

avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

o Use the cruise control system only when

traveling on open highways in good

weather.

o Do not use the cruise control when it

may not be safe to keep the car at a

constant speed, for instance, driving in

heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery

(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding

roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill

roads.

o Pay particular attention to the driving

conditions whenever using the cruise

control system.

o During cruise-control driving with a

manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift

into neutral without depressing the

clutch pedal, or the engine will be

overrevved. If this happens, depress the

clutch pedal or release the main switch.

o With the cruise control engaged, when

the brake pedal is applied, it is normal to

hear the cruise control system deacti-

vate. This is an indication of normal

system operation.

o During normal cruise control operation,

when the "SET(COAST)" is activated or

reactivated after applying the brakes,

the cruise control will energize after

approximately 3 seconds. This delay is

normal.

WARNING:

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

SEEK (UP / ) Switch

Press the SEEK UP ( ) switch 1 sec. or more.

1. RADIO mode

When the SEEK UP ( ) switch is pressed, the

unit will automatically tune to the next higher

frequency.

2. TAPE mode

Pressing the SEEK UP ( ) switch will play the

beginning of the next music segment.

3. CD (compact disc)/CDC

(compact disc changer) mode

Press the SEEK UP ( ) switch once to skip

forward to the beginning of the next track.

VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) button to increase

volume.

o Press the VOL ( ) button to decease

volume.

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCH

B610A01GK-GAT

(If installed)

The steering wheel audio remote control switch

is installed to promote safe driving.

POWER ON/OFF Switch

Press the POWER ON/OFF switch to select

Radio, Tape, CD (compact disc) and CDC

(compact disc changer).

Press the POWER ON/OFF switch once again

to cancel Radio, Tape, CD (compact disc) and

CDC (compact disc changer).

B610A01GK

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A02GK-GAT

1. Side Defrost Nozzle

2. Side Ventilator

3. Windshield Defrost Nozzle

4. Center Ventilator HGK0003-1

B710B02O-AAT

CENTER VENTILATOR

The center ventilators are located in the middle

of the dashboard. To change the direction of the

air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent

up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents are

opened when the vent knob is moved to " "

position. The vents are closed when the vent

knob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clear

of any obstructions.

B710C01JM-AAT

SIDE VENTILATOR

The side ventilators are located on each side of

the dash board. To change the direction of the

air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent

up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents are

opened when the vent knob is moved to " "

position. The vents are closed when the vent

knob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clear

of any obstructions.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

72 HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01GK-GAT

Rotary Type

1. Air Conditioning switch

2. Air intake control switch

3. Rear window defroster switch

4. Air flow control switch

5. Fan speed control switch

6. Temperature control switch

HGK002-3

B670B02A-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

This is used to turn the blower fan on or off and

to select the fan speed.

This blower fan speed, and therefore the vol-

ume of air delivered from the system, may be

controlled manually by setting the blower con-

trol between the "1" and "4" positions. The "0"

position turns the blower fan off.

NOTE:

If the blower fan is off, the air intake control

is set to the fresh mode automatically.

HGK2093

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degree of

heating or cooling desired.

Cool

HGK2092

Warm

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B670D04GK-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be

directed to the floor, instrument panel outlets, or

windshield. Five symbols are used to represent

Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and De-

frost air position. The MAX A/C mode is used to

cool the inside of the vehicle faster.

HGK005-1

B670C02GK-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air or

recirculating inside air.

To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh

mode, Recirculation mode) push the control

button.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on

the button goes off when the air intake control

is fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The indicator

light on the button is illuminated when the air

intake control is recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the

vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled

according to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from

within the passenger compartment will be drawn

through the heating system and heated or

cooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in "Recircula-

tion" mode will give rise to fogging of the

windshield and side windows and the air

within the passenger compartment will

become stale. In addition, prolonged use of

the air conditioning with the "Recircula-

tion" mode selected may result in the air

within the passenger compartment becom-

ing excessively dry.

HGK2100

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be

discharged through the side and center venti-

lators.

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the dash vents and the

floor vents.

HGK2095 HGK2096

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-

shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle,

side ventilator.

If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"

mode will be activated.

HGK2097

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.

If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C will

turn on automatically and "Recirculation" mode

will be activated.

HGK021-1

MAX

A/C

mode except the defrost mode and the

floor-defrost mode. Although the A/C

switch indicator is turned off, this is normal

operation.

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrost

nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.

If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will

turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be

activated.

NOTE:

If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode is

selected, the air conditioning will not turn

off by pushing the A/C button.

If the air flow control is set to the defrost or

the floor-defrost mode, the A/C will be on

automatically and the A/C will not off until

the air flow control is set to the another

HGK2099

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrost

nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle,

side ventilator.

If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C

will be turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode

will be activated.

HGK2098

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

76 HEATING CONTROLS

B690A02S-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the air intake

control to the "Fresh" position and the air flow

control to "Floor".

For faster heating, the air intake control should

be in the "Recirculation" position.

If the windows fog up, move the air flow control

to the "Def" (defroster) position. (The A/C will

turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be

activated.)

For maximum heat, rotate the temperature

control to the farthest right position.

B690A01GK-A

* The A/C or the air intake control switch return

to its former setting.

A/C

ON or OFF *

NOTE:

o The air intake control switch will change

to " " mode when the ignition switch

is turned "ON" with the MAX A/C mode

selected.

o When you change to another mode from

MAX A/C, the A/C and the air intake

control switch are set to the following

chart.

Air Intake

Control Switch

or *

BI-LEVEL HEATING

B700A02E-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heating

controls. To use this feature:

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( )

position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )

position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired

speed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"

and "Warm".

B700A01GK-A

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Set the side vent control to " ", to shut off

outside air entry.

o Turn on the fan control switch.

o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing in on the switch. The air conditioning

indicator light should come on at the same

time.

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode

( ).

B710A01GK-A

VENTILATION

B710A01S-AAT

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode

( ).

o To direct all intake air to the instrument panel

vents, set the airflow control to "Face".

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired

speed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"

and "Warm".

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch (If installed)

The air conditioning is turned on or off by

pushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-

ditioning control panel.

HGK2089-1

B740B01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Operation

Cooling

HGK002-1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"

provides maximum cooling. The tempera-

ture may be moderated by moving the con-

trol toward "Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.

For greater cooling, turn the fan control to

one of the higher speeds or temporarily

select the "Recirculation" position on the air

intake control.

B740C01S-AAT

Dehumidified Heating

B730A01FC-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the car through the ventilation sys-

tem, temporarily set the air intake control to

"Recirculation". Be sure to return the control

to "Fresh" when the irritation has passed to

keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help

keep the driver alert and comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn

in through the grilles just ahead of the wind-

shield. Care should be taken that these are

not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other

obstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set

the air intake control to the fresh air ( )

position and fan speed to the desired posi-

tion.

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.

o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air

conditioning indicator light should come on at

the same time.

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode

( ).

o Set the air flow control to "Face".

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.

o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.

o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

B740C01GK-A

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02FC-GAT

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the

windshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be

activated)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.

o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be

activated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.

o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:

When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form

on the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control

to the low position.

A Type

B720A01GK-1 B720A02GK-1

B Type A Type B Type

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

80 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If lnstalled)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B02GK-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

TYPE A (Without Air Quality System) TYPE B (With Air Quality System)

1. Temperature Control Button

2. Air Conditioning Switch

3. Display Window

4. Fan Speed Control Switch

5. Air Flow Control Switch

6. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch

7. Defroster Switch

8. OFF Switch

9. Air lntake Control Switch

10.Ambient Temperature Switch

11.Rear Window Defroster Switch

12.Air Quality System Switch (If installed)

HGK2101 HGK2102

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B970C02E-AAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-

trol) system automatically controls heating and

cooling as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator light

will illuminate confirming that the Face, Floor

and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower

speed and, air conditioner will be controlled

automatically.

HGK2106 2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desired

temperature.

The temperature will increase to the maxi-

mum 90°F(32°C) by pushing on the button.

Each push of the button will cause the tem-

perature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).

The temperature will decrease to the mini-

mum 62°F(17°C) by pushing on the button.

Each push of the button will cause the tem-

perature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).

NOTE:

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, the temperature mode will reset

to centigrade degrees.

This is a normal condition and you can

change the temperature mode from centi-

grade to farenheit as follows;

Press the TEMP button down 3 seconds or

more with the button held down. The

display shows that the unit of temperature

is adjusted to centigrade or fahrenheit.

(°C →→

→→

→ °F or °F →→

→→

→ °C)

NOTE:

Never place anything over the sensor which

is located on the instrument panel to en-

sure better control of the heating and cool-

ing system.

HGK2103

HGK2076

Photo sensor

OUTSIDE

TEMP

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B995A01Y-GAT

Ambient Temperature Switch

Pressing the button displays the ambient

temperature on the display.

HGK2109

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-

trolled manually as well by pushing buttons

other than the "AUTO" button. In this state, the

system sequentially works according to the

order of buttons selected.

The function of the buttons which are not se-

lected will be controlled automatically.

Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to

automatic control of the system.

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed

by pressing the appropriate fan speed control

button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air

is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns off

the fan.

HGK2104

OUTSIDE

TEMP

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HGK2110-1

B670C02GK-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch

(Without A.Q.S)

This is used to select fresh outside air or

recirculation inside air.

To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh

mode, Recirculation mode) push the control

button.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on

the button goes on when the air intake control

is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indica-

tor light on the button is illuminated when the air

intake control is in recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the

vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled

according to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from

within the passenger compartment will be drawn

through the heating system and heated or

cooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in "recirculation"

mode will give rise to fogging of the wind-

shield and side windows and the air within

the passenger compartment will become

stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode

selected may result in the air within the

passenger compartment becoming exces-

sively dry.

B980C02GK-GAT

Air Intake Control Switch (With A.Q.S)

(If Installed)

This is used to select fresh outside air or

recirculate inside air automatically.

: OFF

: ON

Fresh mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is

heated or cooled according to the function

selected.

HGK2110

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Recirculation mode :

Air from within the passenger compartment will

be drawn through the heating system and heated

or cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust gas cutoff mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside.

But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the

outside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) is

automatically converted to the mode, to

prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE:

It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in recirculation

mode ( ) will give rise to misting of the

windshield and side windows and the air

within the passenger compartment will

become stale. In addition, prolonged use of

the air conditioning with the recirculation

mode ( ) selected may result in the air

within the passenger compartment becom-

ing excessively dry.

B980E01GK-GAT

Air Flow Control

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of

the heating and cooling system.

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be

directed to the floor, instrument panel outlets, or

windshield. Four symbols are used to represent

Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost air

position.

HGK2105

CAUTION:

If the windows fog up with the Recircula-

tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the air

intake control to the Fresh air position or

A.Q.S control to "OFF".

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicator

light will come on, causing air to be discharged

through the face level vents.

HGK2095

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indica-

tor light will come on and the air will be dis-

charged through the face vents and the floor

vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air

from the dashboard vents and warmer air from

the floor outlets at the same time.

HGK2096

Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, the

indicator light will come on and the air will be

discharged through the floor vents, windshield

defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side

ventilator.

HGK2097

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, the

indicator light will come on and the air will be

discharged through the windshield defrost

nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle,

side ventilator.

HGK2098

B980F02E-AAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the " "

mode will be automatically selected and the air

will be discharged through the windshield de-

frost vents. To assist in defrosting, the air

conditioning will operate if ambient temperature

is higher than 38.3 °F (3.5 °C) and automatically

turns off if the ambient temperature drops below

38.3 °F (3.5 °C).

HGK012

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

B760A06GK-AAT

(If Installed)

The climate control air filter is located in front of

the blower uniit behind the glove box.

It operates to decrease the amount of pollutants

entering the car.

To replace the climate control air filter, refer to

the page 6-18.

B760A01E

Evaporator core

Filter

Heater core

Outside air

Inside air

Blower fan

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

!CAUTION:

o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year. If the car is

being driven in severe conditions such

as dusty, rough roads, more frequent

climate control air filter inspections and

changes are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased, the

system should be checked at an autho-

rized dealer.

o If your vehicle is not equipped with this

filter, it can be installed by your dealer.

Check with your dealer for details.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

88 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructed

area

FM radio station

B750A03L

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed area Iron bridges

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-

cies and do not bend to follow the earth's

surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-

erally begin to fade at short distances from the

station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by

buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.

These can result in certain listening conditions

which might lead you to believe a problem exists

with your radio. The following conditions are

normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greater

distances than FM broadcasts. This is because

AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-

cies. These long, low frequency radio waves

can follow the curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In

addition, they curve around obstructions so that

they can provide better signal coverage.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from

transmitter towers located around your city.

They are intercepted by the radio antenna on

your car. This signal is then received by the

radio and sent to your car speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your

vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio

system ensures the best possible quality repro-

duction. However, in some cases the signal

coming to your vehicle may not be strong and

clear. This can be due to factors such as the

distance from the radio station, closeness of

other strong radio stations or the presence of

buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in

the area.

Ionosphere

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B750A04L B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-

ens, another more powerful signal near the

same frequency may begin to play. This is

because your radio is designed to lock onto

the clearest signal. If this occurs, select

another station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being

received from several directions can cause

distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by

a direct and reflected signal from the same

station, or by signals from two stations with

close frequencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition has passed.

o Fading - As your car moves away from the

radio station, the signal will weaken and

sound will begin to fade. When this occurs,

we suggest that you select another stronger

station.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large

obstructions between the transmitter and

your radio can disturb the signal causing

static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing

the treble level may lessen this effect until the

disturbance clears.

B750B05Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,

noise may be produced from the audio equip-

ment. This does not mean that something is

wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,

use the cellular phone at a place as far as

possible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:

Hyundai recommends that you never use a

cell phone while driving. This could result

in loss of control, and an accident that may

cause death, serious injury, or property

damage. You must stop at a safe place to

use a cellular phone.

NOTE:

Some states and cities have regulations

prohibiting the use of cell phones while

driving. You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your area.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

90 AUDIO SYSTEM

H240A01O-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H250) (If Installed)

1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

H250A01GK

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

(BASS/BAL)

3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob

(TREB/FAD)

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

5. BAND Selector

6. PRESET Buttons

7. SCAN Button

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

H240B02A-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control

Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition

key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the

knob to switch the power on. The LCD shows

the radio frequency in the radio mode or the tape

direction indicator in the tape mode. To switch

the power off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the

volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to

reduce the volume.

2. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or

right for the desired bass tone.

BAL (Balance Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn the

control knob clockwise to emphasize right

speaker sound (left speaker sound will be

attenuated).

When the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized

(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or

right for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the treble control knob further out.

Turn the control knob counterclockwise to

emphasize front speaker sound (rear speaker

sound will be attenuated).

When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear

speaker sound will be emphasized (front

speaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the side or side to increase or to

decrease the frequency. Press either button

and hold down to continuously scroll. Release

button once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button 1 sec or

more.Releasing it will automatically tune to the

next available station with a beep sound.

When the side is pressed longer than 1 second,

releasing will automatically tune to the next

higher frequency and when the side is pressed

longer than 1 second, releasing will automati-

cally tune to the next lower frequency.

5. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,

FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is

displayed on LCD.

6. PRESET STATION SELECT

Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respec-

tively can be preset in the electronic memory

circuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-

grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, by

simply pressing the band select button and/or

one of the six station select buttons, you may

recall any of these stations instantly. To pro-

gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,

FM1, or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored by

seek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select button

you wish to use to access that station.

FM/AM

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

o Press the station select button for more than

two seconds. A select button indicator will

show in the display indicating which select

button you have depressed. The frequency

display will flash after it has been stored into

the memory with a beep sound. You should

then release the button, and proceed to

program the next desired station. A total of

18 stations can be programmed by selecting

one AM and two FM stations per button.

o When completed, any preset station may be

recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band

and the appropriate station button.

7. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequency

will increase and the receivable stations will be

tuned in one after another, receiving each sta-

tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the

scan button again.

CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the audio system mechanism could be

damaged.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

H240C01O-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H250) (If Installed)

1. FF/REW Button

H240C01GK

2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

4. EJECT Button

5. DOLBY SELECT Button

6. TAPE SLOT

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

H240A02O-AAT

1. FF/REW Button

o The FF (fast forward tape winding) starts

when the button is pressed during PLAY

or REW.

o The PLAY starts when the button is

pressed again during FF.

o The REW (rewinding) starts when the

button is pressed during PLAY or FF.

o The PLAY starts when the button is

pressed again during REW.

2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button

Press the button to find the starting point of each

song in a prerecorded music tape.

The quiet space between songs (must have at

least a 4 sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO

MUSIC SELECT button.

o Pressing the button will play the beginning

of the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay at

the beginning of the music just listened to.

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of the

tape by merely depressing the program button.

An arrow will appear in the display to show tape

direction.

NOTE:

When tape operation is abnormal or ER8

fault code is displayed, press the eject

button more than 5 seconds to reset the

deck function.

4. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressed during

FF/REW, the cassette will eject.

5. DOLBY SELECT Button

If you get background noise during PLAY, you

can reduce this considerably by merely press-

ing DOLBY SELECT button.

If you want to release, press the button again.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

H260A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

H260A01GK

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob

2. FADER Control Knob

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

4. SCAN Button

7. PRESET Buttons

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

6. BAND Selector

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

H260B03E-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition

key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the

knob to switch the power on. The LCD shows

the radio frequency in the radio mode or the CD

track indicator in either the CD mode or CD

AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch the power

off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the

volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to

reduce the volume.

BALANCE Control

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise to

emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker

sound will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker

sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound

will be attenuated).

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise to

emphasize front speaker sound (rear speaker

sound will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound

will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be

attenuated).

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or

right for the desired bass tone.

TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn to the

left or right for the desired treble tone.

4. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequency

will increase and the receivable stations will be

tuned in one after another, receiving each sta-

tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the

scan button again.

5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to

decrease the frequency. Press either button

and hold down to continuously scroll. Release

button once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel

Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec or more.

Releasing it will automatically tune to the next

available station with a beep sound.

When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 1

second, releasing will automatically tune to the

next higher frequency and when the ( ) side

is pressed longer than 1 second, releasing will

automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,

FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is

displayed on LCD.

7. PRESET STATION SELECT

Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respec-

tively can be preset in the electronic memory

circuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-

grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, by

simply pressing the band select button and/or

one of the six station select buttons, you may

recall any of these stations instantly. To pro-

gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,

FM1 or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored by

seek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select button

you wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more than

two seconds. A select button indicator will

show in the display indicating which select

button you have depressed. The frequency

display will flash after it has been stored into

the memory.

You should then release the button, and

proceed to program the next desired station.

A total of 18 stations can be programmed by

selecting one AM and two FM stations per

button.

o When completed, any preset station may be

recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band

and the appropriate station button.

CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the audio system mechanism could be

damaged.

FM/AM

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

H260B01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

H260B01GK

1. Playing CD

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. SCAN Button

5. REPEAT Button

6. EJECT Button

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

B260D03O-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.

o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation.

o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button, the CD player will begin

playing even if the radio is being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignition

switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse through

the compact disc track, push and hold the FF

( ) or REW ( ) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc

player will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being

played can be selected using the track

number.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-

ing of the next track. Press once to skip

back to the beginning of the track.

4. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first

10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.

When you have reached the desired track.

5. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-

ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,

press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when the

track ends, it will automatically be replayed.

This process will be continued until you push

the button again.

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button is pressed with a

CD loaded, the CD will eject.

NOTE:

o If the CD does not operate properly or if

the ER2 fault code is displayed, use one

of two methods to reset the CD deck

function.

- Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes.

Then, reinstall the audio fuse.

- Disconnect the negative terminal of

the battery and wait 5 minutes. Then

reconnect the negative battery termi-

nal.

o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperature

within a normal range by using the

vehicle’s air conditioning or heating

system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are all

erased when the car battery is discon-

nected. Therefore, all data will have to be

set again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.

Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other

metallic objects away from the tape

mechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system with

negative ground.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

100

o This unit is made of precision parts. Do

not attempt to disassemble or adjust

any parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set low

enough to allow you to hear sounds

coming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-

ing the speakers) to water or excessive

moisture.

!CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to the

unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations may

skip your compact disc.

Do not use the audio system off-road as

the discs could be scratched and dam-

aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your

hand while the disc is being pulled into

the unit by the self loading mechanism.

These can cause poor disc scratching to

occur or trouble in the compact disc

player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

Rewritable to ensure proper operation.

When using the compact disc player,

genuine CDs are recommended.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

101

B260E01E-AAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H260) (If installed)

H260E01GK

1. CD Select Button

2. DISC Select Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button

5. REPEAT Button

6. SCAN Button

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

102

B260F01GK-AAT

The CD auto changer is located in the right side

of the quater trim.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.

2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located inside the CD auto

changer.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.

4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when the

ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC"

position.

1. CD Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs,

press the "CD" button and the CD changer can

be used even if the radio is being used. The

Hyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs.

The disc number will be lit, and the track number,

and elapsed time will be displayed.

2. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push " " to change

the disc number.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being

played can be selected using the track

number.

o Press once to skip forward to the begin-

ning of the next track. Press once to skip

back to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse through

the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF

( ) or REW ( ) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc

player will resume playing.

5. REPEAT

o To repeat the music you are listening to,

press the RPT button. To cancel, press

again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when the

track ends, it will automatically be replayed.

This process will be continued until you push

the button again.

6. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first

10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.

for the desired track.

NOTE:

o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.

o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system with

negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Do

not attempt to disassemble or adjust

any parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set low

enough to allow you to hear sounds

coming from the outside.

TUNE

DISC

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

103

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD changer as damage to

the unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

changer slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations may

skip your compact disc.

Do not use the audio system off-road as

the discs could be scratched and dam-

aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your

hand while the disc is being pulled into

the unit by the self loading mechanism.

These can cause disc scratching to oc-

cur or trouble in the compact disc

changer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

Rewritable to ensure proper operation.

When using the compact disc changer,

genuine CDs are recommended.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

104

H290A01FC-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

H290A01GK

1. POWER ON/OFF VOLUME Control Knob

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

3. TREBLE/FAD Konb

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

5. PRESET Buttons

6. BAND Select Button

7. EQUALIZER Button

8. SCAN Button (If installed)

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

105

H290B03E-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition

key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the

button to switch the power on. The display

shows the radio frequency in the radio mode,

the tape direction indicator in the tape mode or

CD track in either the CD mode or CD AUTO

CHANGER mode. To switch the power off,

press the button again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the

volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to

reduce the volume.

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out. To increase the bass,

rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the

bass, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

BALANCE Control knob

Pull the Bass control knob out further. Rotate the

knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker

sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated).

When the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized

(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREBLE/FAD Knob

TREBLE Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or

right for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the Treble control knob out further. Turn the

control knob counterclockwise to emphasize

front speaker sound (rear speaker sound will be

attenuated). When the control knob is turned

clockwise, rear speaker sound will be empha-

sized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to

decrease the frequency. Press either button

and hold down to continuously scroll. Release

button once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel

Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec or

more. Releasing it will automatically tune to the

next available station with a beep sound.

When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5

second, releasing will automatically tune to the

next higher frequency and when the ( ) side is

pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing will

automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

5. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-

tively can be preset in the electronic memory

circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-

grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, by

simply pressing the band select button and/or

one of the six station select buttons, you may

recall any of these stations instantly. To pro-

gram the stations, follow these steps:

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

106

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,

FM or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored by

seek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select button

you wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more than

two seconds. A select button indicator will

show in the display indicating which select

button you have depressed. The frequency

display will flash after it has been stored into

the memory with beep sound. You should

then release the button, and proceed to

program the next desired station. A total of

18 stations can be programmed by selecting

one AM and two FM station per button.

o When completed, any preset station may be

recalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 band

and the appropriate station button.

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,

FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is

shown on the display.

7. EQUALIZER Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,

JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the

desired tone quality. Each press of the button

changes the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

FM/AM

8. SCAN Button (If installed)

When the scan button is pressed, the frequency

will increase and the receivable stations will be

tuned in one after another, receiving each sta-

tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the

scan button again.

!CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the audio system mechanism could be

damaged.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

107

H290C01FC-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

H290A02GK

1. FF/REW Button

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

5. EQUALIZER Button

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

4. TAPE EJECT Button

6. DOLBY Button

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

108

H290D02O-GAT

1. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when the

FF ( ) button is pressed during the PLAY

or REW mode.

o Tape play starts when the FF ( ) button

is pressed again during the FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REW

( ) button is pressed during the PLAY or

FF mode.

o Tape play starts when the REW ( ) button

pressed again during the REW mode.

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

Press the button to find the starting point of each

song in a prerecorded music tape. The quiet

space between songs (must have at least a 4

sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC

Select button.

o Pressing the button will play the beginn-

ing of the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay at

the beginning of the music just listened to.

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of the

tape by merely depressing the program button.

An arrow will appear in the display to show tape

direction.

4. TAPE EJECT button

o When the button is pressed with the

cassette loaded, the cassette is ejected.

o When the button is pressed during the

FF/REW mode, the cassette is ejected.

5. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,

JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the

desired tone quality. Each press of the button

changes the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,

you can reduce this considerably by merely

pressing the DOLBY button. If you want to

cancel the DOLBY feature, press the button

again.

!CAUTION:

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

109

H290E01FC-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

H290A03GK

1. CD Select Button

2. FF/REW Button

5. EQUALIZER Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. REPEAT

7. SCAN Button (If installed)

6. CD EJECT Button

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

110

H290F01O-GAT

1. CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.

o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation or cassette tape playing.

o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button the CD player will begin playing

even if the radio or cassette player is being

used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignition

switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse through

the compact disc track, push and hold the FF

( ) or REW ( ) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc

player will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being

played can be selected using the track

number.

o Press button once to skip forward to the

beginning of the next track. Press button

once to skip back to the beginning of the

track.

4. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are listening to,

press the RPT button. To cancel, press

again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when the

track ends, it will automatically be replayed.

This process will be continued until you push

the button again.

5. EQUALIZER Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,

JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the

desired tone quality. Each press of the button

changes the display as follows;

7. SCAN Button (If installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first

10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.

When you have reached the desired track.

NOTE:

o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperature

within a normal range by using the

vehicle’s air conditioning or heating

system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are all

erased when the car battery is discon-

nected. Therefore, all data will have to be

set again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.

Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other

metallic objects away from the tape

mechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system with

negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Do

not attempt to disassemble or adjust

any parts.

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

6. CD EJECT Button

When the button is pressed with a CD loaded,

the CD will eject.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

111

o When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set low

enough to allow you to hear sounds

coming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-

ing the speakers and tape) to water or

excessive moisture.

!CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to the

unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations may

skip your compact disc.

Do not use the audio system off-road as

the discs could be scratched and dam-

aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your

hand while the disc is being pulled into

the unit by the self loading mechanism.

These can cause disc scratching to oc-

cur or trouble in the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

Rewritable to ensure porper operation.

When using the compact disc player,

genuine CDs are recommended.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

112

H290G01FC-GAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H280) (If Installed)

H290A04GK

1. CD CHANGER Select Button

2. DISC Select Button

6. SCAN Button (If installed)

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button

7. EQ Button

5. REPEAT

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

113

B290H01GK-GAT

The CD auto changer is located in the right side

of the quater trim.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.

2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located inside the CD auto

changer.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.

4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when the

ignition switch is in either "ON" or "ACC"

position.

1. CD CHANGER Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs,

press the "CD/CDC" button and the CD changer

can be used even if the radio or cassette player

is being used. The Hyundai CD changer can

hold up to eight discs. The disc number will be

lit, and the track number, and elapsed time will

be displayed.

2. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push " " to change

the disc number.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being

played can be selected using the track

number.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-

ing of the next track. Press once to skip

back to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse through

the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF

( ) or REW ( ) button.

When you release the button, the compact disc

player will resume playing.

5. REPEAT

o To repeat the music you are listening to,

press the RPT button. To cancel, press

again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when the

track ends, it will automatically be replayed.

This process will be continued until you push

the button again.

6. SCAN Button (If installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first

10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.

for the desired track.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,

JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the

desired tone quality. Each press of the button

changes the display as follows;

TUNE

DISC

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

NOTE:

o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.

o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system with

negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Do

not attempt to disassemble or adjust

any parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set low

enough to allow you to hear sounds

coming from the outside.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

114

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the changer as damage to the

unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

changer slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations may

skip your compact disc.

Do not use the audio system off-road as

the discs could be scratched and dam-

aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your

hand while the disc is being pulled into

the unit by the self loading mechanism.

These can cause disc scratching to oc-

cur or trouble in the compact disc

changer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

Rewritable to ensure proper operation.

When using the compact disc changer,

genuine CDs are recommended.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

115

6. EQ Button

J290A01JM-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290A01JM

1. POWER ON/OFF/VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. SEEK Select Button

4. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

5. BEST STATION

MEMORY

7. TUNE Select Knob /

MODE Select Knob

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

116

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

J290B01JM-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME

Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignition

key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the

button to switch the power on. The display

shows the radio frequency in the radio mode,

the tape direction indicator in the tape mode, or

CD track in the CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To

switch the power off, press the button again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the

volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to

reduce the volume.

2. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1 and

FM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on the

display.

3. SEEK Select Button

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the SEEK select button 1 sec. or more.

When the ( ) side is pressed, the unit will

automatically tune to the next higher frequency

and when the ( ) side is pressed, it will

automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

o When completed, any preset station may be

recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band

and the appropriate station button.

5. Best Station Memory Button

(BSM)

When the BSM button is pressed for two sec-

onds or longer, the six channels from the high-

est field intensity are selected next and stored

in memory. The stations selected are stored in

the sequence frequency from the first preset

key.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,

JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the

desired tone quality. Each press of the button

changes the display as follows;

4. PRESET STATION Select

Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-

tively can be preset in the electronic memory

circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-

grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, by

simply pressing the AM / FM select button and/

or one of the six station select buttons, you may

recall any of these stations instantly. To pro-

gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press AM/FM selector to set the band for

AM, FM1 and FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored by

seek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select button

you wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more than

two seconds. A select button indicator will

show in the display indicating which select

button you have depressed. The frequency

display will flash after it has been stored into

the memory. You should then release the

button, and proceed to program the next

desired station. A total of 18 stations can be

programmed by selecting one AM and two

FM station per button.

7. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the

frequency and turn the knob counterclockwise

to reduce the frequency.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

117

Mode Select Knob

Pressing the MODE button changes the BASS,

MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE

mode.

The mode selected is shown on the display.

After selecting the each mode, rotate the mode

select knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clock-

wise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the

knob counterclockwise.

MID Control

To increase the MID, rotate the knob clockwise,

while to decrease the MID, rotate the knob

counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clock-

wise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the

knob counterclockwise.

FAD (Fader Control)

Rotate the control knob clockwise to empha-

size rear speaker sound (front speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control knob is

turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound

will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be

attenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right

speaker sound (left speaker sound will be

attenuated). When the control knob is turned

counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be

emphasized (right speaker sound will be at-

tenuated).

!CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the audio system mechanism could be

damaged.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

118

J290C01JM-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290C01JM

1.TAPE PROGRAM Button

3. DOLBY Button

4.REPEAT Button

5.AUTO MUSIC Select Button

6.FF/REW Button

2.EJECT Button

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

119

J290D01JM-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of the

tape by merely pressing the program button.

The PLAY and an arrow will appear in the display

to show tape direction.

2. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,

you can reduce this considerably by merely

pressing the DOLBY button. If you want to

cancel the DOLBY feature, press the button

again.

4. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-

ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,

press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when the

track ends, it will automatically be replayed.

This process will be continued until you push

the button again.

5. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

Press the button to find the starting point of each

song in a prerecorded music tape. The quiet

space between songs (must have at least a 4

sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC

Select button.

o Pressing the will play the beginning of

the next music segment.

o Pressing the will start replay at the

beginning of the music just listened to.

o To stop FF or REW action, press the button

again.

6. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when the

FF button is pressed during PLAY or REW

mode.

o PLAY starts when the FF ( ) button is

pressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REW ( )

button is pressed during PLAY or FF mode.

o PLAY starts when the REW button pressed

again during REW mode.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

120

1.LOAD Button

J290E01JM-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER / CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290E01JM

2.Playing CD

3.EJECT Button

4. DISC Select

Button

5.RANDOM Play Button

6.REPEAT Button

7.TRACK UP/DOWN

8.FF/REW Button

9.SCAN Button

10.EQ Button

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

121

J290F02JM-GAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc playing will accommodate up

to six discs.

To insert one disc do the following:

1. Press and release the LOAD Button.

2. Green light on both sides of the slot will be

illuminated and the will blink ten times on

the display.

3. Load a disc while the is blinking. Insert a

disc partway into the slot, label side up. The

player will pull the disc in.

NOTE:

o The disc can be only inserted while the

light is blinking.

o This CD player is suitable only for 12 cm

discs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.

When the disc is inserted, the disc will begin to

play automatically.

To insert multiple discs do the followings:

1. Press and hold the LOAD button for two

seconds or more.

You will then hear two beeps and the green

light on the both sides of the slot will be

illuminated.

2. Load a disc while the is blinking. Insert

a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The

player will pull the disc in.

Once the disc is loaded, the numbers of the

vacant disc will blink on the display continu-

ously. If the next "DISC NO." is appeared on

the display with the both side of the slot

illuminated, you can then load another disc.

3. Load the remaining disc by following the same

procedures 1 and 2.

When you finished loading 6 discs, the CD

player will begin to play the last CD loaded.

4. To load more than one disc but less than six,

complete Steps 1 and 2. When you have

finished loading discs, press LOAD button to

cancel the loading function or wait for 10

seconds. The CD player will begin to play the

last CD loaded.

As each CD starts to play, the DISC number will

appear on the display.

NOTE:

The disc player takes up to six discs. Do not

try to load more than six.

2. Playing CD

o Press the 6CDC to start CD playback,

during radio operation or cassette tape play-

ing.

o When discs are in the CD deck, if you press

the 6CDC button the CD player will begin

playing even if the radio or cassette player

is being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignition

switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

3. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with

a CD loaded, the CD will eject.

o To eject all of the discs, press this button for

2 seconds or more.

4.DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push "DISC

" or "DISC " to change the disc number.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

122

5. RANDOM Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks in

random, rather than sequential order, on all of

the discs or on one disc.

To use random, do the following:

o Press and release the RDM button to play

the tracks on all of the discs or on one disc

that are loaded, in random order. RDM will

appear in the display. Press RDM to turn if

off.

6. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-

ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,

press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation after all

the tracks are played back, the unit will play

back again from the first track.

7. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently being

played can be selected using the track

number.

o Press once to skip forward to the begin-

ning of the next track.

o Press once to skip back to the beginning

of the track.

8. FF/REW Button

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FF

button continuously, the selected track is ad-

vanced. Holding down the REW button continu-

ously moves the selected track back.

9. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first

10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.

when you have reached the desired track.

10. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,

JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the

desired tone quality. Each press of the button

changes the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

NOTE:

o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperature

within a normal range by using the

vehicle's air conditioning or heating sys-

tem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are all

erased when the car battery is discon-

nected. Therefore, all data will have to be

set again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.

Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other

metallic objects away from the tape

mechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system with

negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Do

not attempt to disassemble or adjust

any parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set low

enough to allow you to hear sounds

coming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-

ing the speakers and tape) to water or

excessive moisture.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

123

!CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to the

unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit may

occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the playback mechanism could be dam-

aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations may

skip your compact disc.

Do not use the audio system off-roads

as the discs could be scratched and

damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your

hand while the disc is being pulled into

the unit by the self loading mechanism.

These can cause disc scratching to oc-

cur or trouble in the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

Rewritable to ensure proper operation.

When using the compact disc player,

genuine CDs are recommended.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

124 AUDIO FAULT CODE

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

Er8

HHH

no CD

B890A01Y-AAT

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below.

If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Then insert a normal CD disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.

CAUSE

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR

TAPE DECK ERROR

TAPE EJECT ERROR

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH

NO DISC IN MAGAZINE

NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

125

CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling

B850A01L

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the

disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-

prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,

it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do

not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on the

disc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped or

cracked discs. These could severely damage

the playback mechanism.

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in their

individual case and store them in a cool place

away from the sun, heat, and dust.

Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand

while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the

self loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

B850A02L

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disc

could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.

Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.

If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean

soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent

to wipe it clean.

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extend

the tape life and increase your listening enjoy-

ment. Always protect your tapes and cassette

cases from direct sunlight, severely cold and

dusty conditions. When not in use, cassettes

should always be stored in the original protec-

tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hot

or cold, allow the interior temperature to become

more comfortable before listening to your cas-

settes.

B860A01L

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

126

Head

Cotton applicator

HGK062

B860A02L

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the player

when not being played. This could damage

the tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use of

tapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).

Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin

and do not perform as well in the automotive

environment.

o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-

ers will develop a coating of tape residue that

can result in deterioration of sound quality,

such as a wavering sound. They should be

cleaned monthly using a commercially avail-

able head cleaning tape or special solution

available from audio specialty shops. Follow

the supplier's directions carefully and never

oil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly wound

on its reel before inserting in the player.

Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to wind

up any slack.

o Be sure that the cassette label is not loose

or peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tape

surfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-

tric motors, speakers or transformers away

from your cassette tapes and tape player

unit.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with the

open side facing down to prevent dust from

setting in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replay

one given tune or tape section. This can

cause poor tape winding to occur, and even-

tually cause excessive internal drag and

poor audio quality in the cassette. If this

occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by

fast winding the tape from end to end several

times. If this does not correct the problem, do

not continue to use the tape in your vehicle.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

127

ANTENNA

B860A03L

NOTE:

Look at a tape before you insert it.

If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning one

of the hubs with a pencil or your finger.

If the label is peeling off, do not put it in the

drive mechanism.

Do not leave tapes sitting where they are

exposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,

such as on top of the dashboard or in the

player.

If a tape is exposed to excessively hot or

cold, let it reach a moderate temperature

before putting it in the player.

B870A01A-AAT

Fixed Rod Antenna

Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to receive

both AM and FM broadcast signals.

This antenna is a removable type. To remove

the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To install

the antenna, turn it clockwise.

CAUTION:

o Be sure to remove the antenna before

washing the car in an automatic car

wash or it may be damaged.

o When reinstalling your antenna, it is

important that it is fully tightened to

ensure proper reception.

B870A01A

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2

Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3

Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4

Starting .......................................................................... 2-5

Operating the Manual Transaxle ................................... 2-6

Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-8

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-12

Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-12

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............................. 2-13

Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-15

Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-16

Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-19

Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-22

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

C010A01GK-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change

in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked

as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any

longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake

set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear

of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle,

contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer

and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

C020A02A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are

no flat tires, puddles of oil, water or other

indications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure the

parking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.

4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.

5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.

6. Close all the doors.

7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.

8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.

9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights are

operating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warning lights and all

bulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01A-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual

transaxle, place the shift lever in neutral and

depress the clutch pedal fully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,

place the shift lever in "P" (park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key and

turn it to the "START" position. Release it as

soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the

key in the "START" position for more than 15

seconds.

NOTE:

o For safety, the engine will not start if the

clutch pedal is not depressed fully

(Manual transaxle) or the shift lever is

not in "P" or "N" Position (Automatic

transaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from

"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-

less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)

position or the negative battery terminal

is disconnected from the battery. To

remove the key, always confirm that the

shift lever is securely positioned in "P"

(Park) (For Automatic transaxle)

o For additional information about start-

ing, see page 2-5.

!WARNING:

o All passengers must be properly belted

whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to

pages: 1-16 through 1-20 for more infor-

mation on their proper use.

o Always check the surrounding areas near

your vehicle for people, especially chil-

dren, before putting a car into 'drive.'

!WARNING:

Always wear appropriate shoes when oper-

ating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,

etc.) may interfere with your

ability to use the brake and accelerator

pedal, and the clutch (if installed).

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C070C03A-AAT

To Remove the Ignition Key

NOTE:

Do not hold the key in the "START" position

for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignition

is on and all accessories may be turned on. If

the engine is not running, the key should not be

left in the "ON" position. This will discharge the

battery and may also damage the ignition sys-

tem.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-

trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-

ated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted in this

position. To protect against theft, the steering

wheel locks by removing the key.

NOTE:

If difficulty is experienced in turning the

ignition key to the START position, turn the

steering wheel right and left to release the

tension and then turn the key.

1. Turn the ignition key counterclockwise from

the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

2. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"

position.

C070C01E-1

LOCK

ACC

START

KEY POSITIONS

C040A02A-AAT

WARNING:

The engine should not be turned off or the

key removed from the ignition key cylinder

while the vehicle is in motion. The steering

wheel is locked by removing the key.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crank

until you release the key.

C040A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

START

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

STARTING

C050A01A-AAT

WARNING:

Never run the engine in a closed or poorly

ventilated area any longer than is needed to

move your car in or out of the area. The

carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless

and can cause serious injury or death.

C050A01E-1

LOCK ON

START

C050B02JM-AAT

NORMAL CONDITIONS:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.

2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the

gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutral

or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in

"P" (park) position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"

position, make certain all warning lights and

gauges are functioning properly before start-

ing the engine.

WARNING:

Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed

when starting a manual transaxle vehicle.

Your manual transaxle equipped vehicle

will not start unless the clutch pedal is fully

depressed.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" position

and release it when the engine starts.

After the engine has started, allow the engine

to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing

the vehicle in gear.

The starter should not be operated for more

than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-

onds between starting attempts to protect

the starter from overheating.

!WARNING:

Always fully depress the brake pedal before

and while shifting out of the "P" Park posi-

tion into another position to avoid inad-

vertent motion of the vehicle which could

injure persons in or around the car.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

CAUTION:

When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth

gear, caution should be taken not to inad-

vertently press the gear shift lever sideways

in such a manner that second gear is en-

gaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause

the engine speed to increase to the point

that the tachometer will enter the red zone.

Such over-revving of the engine may cause

engine damage.

o If you 've come to a complete stop and

it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),

put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position

and release the clutch. Press the clutch

pedal down, and then shift into 1st or

R(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as a handrest

during driving, as this can result in pre-

mature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

OPERATING THE MANUAL

TRANSAXLE

C070A02GK-AAT

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-

ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-

printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully

synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to

either a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-

plished.

HGK3023

Type A Type B

When shifting into reverse gear, pull the mis-

shift prevention tab and shift into reverse gear

position. (B Type: 6 speed type)

NOTE:

o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in

neutral for at least 3 seconds after your

car is completely stopped. Then move

the lever into the reverse position.

o During cold weather, shifting may be

difficult until the transaxle lubricant has

warmed up. This is normal and not harm-

ful to the transaxle.

HGK3024

Type B

Mis-shift

prevention

tab

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C070B01A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to the

floor before shifting, then released slowly. The

clutch pedal should always be fully returned to

the original position. Do not rest your foot on the

clutch pedal while driving. This can cause un-

necessary wear.

Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car

on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.

Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the

car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal

rapidly and repeatedly.

C070D04A-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coast

down a hill. This is extremely hazardous.

Always leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them

to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when

you are driving down a long hill, slow down

and shift to a lower gear. When you do this,

engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.

This will help avoid over-revving the engine,

which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.

This gives you much better control of your

car.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped before

you attempt to shift into reverse. The

transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To

shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move

the shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,

then shift to the reverse position.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a

slippery surface. Be especially careful when

braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-

hicle speed can cause the drive wheels to

lose traction and the vehicle to go out of

control.

!WARNING:

o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantly more

likely to be seriously injured or killed

than a properly belted occupant.

o Avoid high speeds when cornering or

turning.

o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes or

fast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if

you lose control of your vehicle at high-

way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two or

more wheels drop off the roadway and

the driver oversteers to reenter the road-

way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-

way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into the travel

lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the

battery has been disconnected, may be

somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-

tion, and the shifting sequence will adjust

after shifts are cycled a few times by the

T.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

HGK3040

!CAUTION:

Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the

vehicle is moving.

C070E01GK-AAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS

The shift points as shown below are recom-

mended for optimum fuel economy and perfor-

mance.

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

Recommended

15 mph (20 km/h)

25 mph (40 km/h)

35 mph (55 km/h)

45 mph (75 km/h)

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

5-6

Recommended

10 mph (15 km/h)

20 mph (35 km/h)

30 mph (50 km/h)

45 mph (70 km/h)

60 mph (95 km/h)

Type A (5 speed)

Type B (6 speed)

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A03Y-AAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle

has four forward speeds and one reverse

speed. The individual speeds are selected au-

tomatically, depending on the position of the

speed selector lever. The selector lever has 2

gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:

For information on manual gate operation,

refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4

positions, and is equipped with a button to avoid

inadvertent selection.

HGK3025

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C090B01A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-

lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or

while starting the engine. Whenever parking the

car, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-

tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:

Never place the selector lever in the "P"

(Park) position unless the vehicle is fully

stopped. Failure to observe this caution

will cause severe damage to the transaxle.

NOTE:

Depress the brake pedal and push

the button when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shifted

freely.

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster

indicate the selector lever position when the

ignition is switched "ON". During the sports

mode operation, the gear currently in use dis-

plays in the numeral indicator.

C090E01O-AAT

o D(Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-

matically shift through a four gear sequence.

C090D02O-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,

which means that no gears are engaged. The

engine can be started with the shift lever in "N"

position, although this is not recommended

except if the engine stalls while the car is

moving.

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to

a complete stop before shifting the selector

lever to "R" position.

C090F02GK-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,

sports mode is selected by pushing the selector

lever from the "D" position into the manual gate.

To return to "D" range operation, push the

selector lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-

wards and forwards can make rapid gearshifts

simple. In contrast to a manual transaxle, the

sports mode allows gearshifts with the accel-

erator pedal depressed.

UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up

one gear.

DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to

shift down one gear.

HGK3027

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:

o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.

o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with the

brakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-

ing from "P" or "N", to "R", "D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in

place of the parking brake. Always set

the parking brake, shift the transaxle

into "P" (Park) position and turn off the

ignition when you leave the vehicle, even

momentarily. Never leave the vehicle

unattended while the engine is running.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level

regularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o When accelerating from a stop on a

steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-

dency to roll backwards. Shifting the

shift lever into 2nd gear while in Sport

mode will help prevent the vehicle from

rolling backwards.

o See the maintenance schedule for the

proper fluid recommendation.

!CAUTION:

o In sports mode, the driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing road

conditions, taking care to keep the en-

gine speed below the red zone.

o For engine protection, upward shifts are

made automatically when the engine

rpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector lever

backwards (-) twice it is possible to skip

one gear by using the sports mode.

Since sudden engine braking and/or

rapid acceleration can cause a loss of

traction, however, downshifts must be

made carefully in accordance with the

vehicle's speed.

NOTE:

o In sports mode, only the four forward

gears can be selected. To select reverse

or park, move the selector lever to the "R"

or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts are

made automatically when the vehicle

slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st

gear is automatically selected.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-

hicle performance and safety, the sys-

tem may not execute certain gearshifts

when the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on a

slippery road, push the selector lever

forward into the +(UP) position. This

causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd

gear which is better for smooth driving

away on a slippery road. Push the selec-

tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift

back to 1st gear.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:

o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-

tral" position or "Park" position to a

forward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"

position and the brake pedal fully de-

pressed in order to move the shift lever

from the "P" (Park) position to any of the

other positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R",

"N", "D" position to "P" position. The

vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid

transaxle damage.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C090N05O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"

or "N" to any other position with the accelera-

tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"

when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped before

you attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coast

down a hill. This may be extremely hazard-

ous. Always leave the car in gear when

moving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause

them to overheat and malfunction. Instead,

when you are driving down a long hill, slow

down and shift to a lower gear. When you do

this, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.

Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-

gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-

pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep

the car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a

slippery surface. Be especially careful when

braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-

hicle speed can cause the drive wheels to

lose traction and the vehicle to go out of

control.

!WARNING:

o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantly more

likely to be seriously injured or killed

than a properly belted occupant.

o Avoid high speeds when cornering or

turning.

o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes or

fast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if

you lose control of your vehicle at high-

way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two or

more wheels drop off the roadway and

the driver oversteers to reenter the road-

way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-

way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into the travel

lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

o Optimum vehicle performance and economy

is obtained by smoothly depressing and

releasing the accelerator pedal. WARNING:

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,

mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to

rock the vehicle free by moving it forward

and backward. Do not attempt this proce-

dure if people or objects are anywhere near

the vehicle. During the rocking operation

the vehicle may suddenly move forward or

backward as it becomes unstuck, causing

injury or damage to nearby people or ob-

jects.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

12 GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

C130A02A-AAT

WARNING:

o Whenever leaving vehicle or parking,

always set the parking brake as far as

possible and fully engage the vehicle's

transaxle into the park position. Ve-

hicles not fully engaged in park with the

parking brake set are at risk for moving

inadvertently and injuring yourself or

others.

o All vehicles should always have the park-

ing brake fully engaged when parking to

avoid inadvertent movement of the car

which can injure occupants or pedestri-

ans.

o Nothing should be carried on top of the

shelf panel behind the rear seat. If there

were an accident or a sudden stop, such

objects could move forward and cause

damage to the vehicle or injure the occu-

pants.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

C120A03A-AAT

(If installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed

to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking

or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-

trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-

trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,

in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS

will increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:

o A click sound may be heard in the engine

compartment when the vehicle begins

to move after the engine is started. These

conditions are normal and indicate that

the anti-lock brake system (Electronic

Stability Program) is functioning prop-

erly.

o During ABS operation, a slight pulsation

may be felt in the brake pedal when the

brakes are applied. Also, a noise may be

heard in the engine compartment while

braking. These conditions are normal

and indicate that the anti-lock brake

system is functioning properly.

WARNING:

ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-

proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.

Even though vehicle control is improved

during emergency braking, always main-

tain a safe distance between you and ob-

jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always

be reduced during extreme road condi-

tions.

The braking distance for cars equipped

with an anti-lock braking system may be

longer than for those without it in the

following road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle should

be driven at reduced speeds.

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

o With tire chains installed.

o Roads where the road surface is pitted or

has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equipped

vehicle should not be tested by high speed

driving or cornering. This could endanger

the safety of yourself or others.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

o If your car is equipped with an automatic

transaxle, don’t let your car creep forward.

To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot on

the brake pedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Firmly

engage the parking brake and place the gear

selector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or

in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle).

If your car is facing downhill, turn the front

wheels into the curb to help keep the car from

rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the front

wheels away from the curb to help keep the

car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is

required by other conditions to keep the car

from rolling, block the wheels.

o Under some conditions your parking brake

can freeze in the engaged position. This is

most likely to happen when there is an

accumulation of snow or ice around or near

the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If

there is a risk that the parking brake may

freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put

the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or

in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)

and block the rear wheels so the car cannot

roll. Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with

the accelerator pedal. This can cause the

transmission to overheat. Always use the

brake pedal or parking brake.

o After being parked, check to be sure the

parking brake is not engaged and that the

parking brake indicator light is out before

driving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakes

wet. They can also get wet when the car is

washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!

Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes

are wet. Wet brakes cause the car to pull to

one side. To dry the brakes, apply the

brakes lightly while driving slowly until the

braking action returns to normal, taking care

to keep the car under control at all times. If

the braking action does not return to normal,

stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call your

Hyundai dealer for assistance.

o Don’t coast down hills with the car out of gear.

This is extremely hazardous. Keep the car

in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow

down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine

braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don’t "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your

foot on the brake pedal while driving can be

dangerous because it can result in the brakes

overheating and losing their effectiveness. It

also increases the wear of the brake com-

ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply

the brakes gently and keep the car pointed

straight ahead while you slow down. When

you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe

to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe

place.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY

PROGRAM (ESP)

C310A02JM-AAT

(If installed)

!WARNING:

Never drive too fast for the road conditions

or too quickly when cornering. Electronic

stability control (ESP) will not prevent acci-

dents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet sur-

faces can still result in serious accidents.

Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent

accidents by avoiding maneuvers that

cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with

ESP installed, always follow all the normal

precautions for driving - including driving

at safe speeds for the conditions.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

HGK3033-1

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system

is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cor-

nering manuevers. ESP checks where you are

steering and where the vehicle is actually going.

ESP applies the brakes at individual wheels and

intervenes in the engine management system

to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system

is an electronic system designed to help the

driver maintain vehicle control under adverse

conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving

practices. Factors including speed, road con-

ditions and driver steering input can all affect

whether ESP will be effective in preventing a

loss of control. It is still your responsibility to

drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to

leave a sufficient margin of safety.

CAUTION:

Driving with varying tire or wheel size may

cause the ESP system to malfunction. When

replacing tires, make sure they are the same

size as your original tires.

C310B01JM-AAT

ESP ON/OFF Mode

When the ESP is operating, the ESP indicator in

the instrument cluster will blink.

If you turn the system off by pressing the ESP

switch, the ESP-OFF indicator will come on and

stay on. In the ESP-OFF mode, the stability

control will be deactivated. Adjust your driving

accordingly. To turn the system back on, press

the switch again. The ESP-OFF indicator should

go off.

NOTE:

The ESP mode will automatically be turned

ON after the engine is turned off and re-

started.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A02A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from your

car if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate

rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-

throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising

speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to

adjust your speed to that of the other traffic

so you don't have to change speeds unnec-

essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-

sible. Always maintain a safe distance from

other vehicles so you can avoid unneces-

sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you

drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at

a moderate speed, especially on the high-

way, is one of the most effective ways to

reduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This

can increase fuel consumption and also

increase wear on these components. In

addition, driving with your foot resting on the

brake pedal may cause the brakes to over-

heat, which reduces their effectiveness and

may lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated

to the recommended pressure. Incorrect

inflation, either too much or too little, results

in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire

pressures at least once a month.

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-

rectly. Improper alignment can result from

hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular

surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire

wear and may also result in other problems

as well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For better

fuel economy and reduced maintenance

costs, maintain your car in accordance with

the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If

you drive your car in severe conditions,

more frequent maintenance is required (see

Section 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,

your Hyundai should be kept clean and free

of corrosive materials. It is especially impor-

tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to

accumulate on the underside of the car. This

extra weight can result in increased fuel

consumption and also contribute to corro-

sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary

weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel

economy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-

sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),

turn off your engine and restart only when

you're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not require

extended warm-up. After the engine has

started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20

seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.

In very cold weather, however, give your

engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-

tion key is turned to ON or START but should

go out after three seconds.

If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESP or

ESP-OFF indicator does not go out after 3

seconds, have the vehicle checked by an

authorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in the

device while driving, ESP-OFF indicator illumi-

nates as a warning.

If ESP-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car

to a safe place and stop the engine.

Then, start the engine again to check if the ESP-

OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the engine

has been started, have your car checked by an

authorized Hyundai dealer.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging

is driving too slowly in too high a gear result-

ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,

shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing

the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be

avoided by shifting at the recommended

speeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air

conditioning system is operated by engine

power so your fuel economy is reduced

when you use it.

SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,

especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners

should always be taken under gentle accelera-

tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear

will be held to a minimum.

WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winter

result in greater wear and other problems. To

minimize the problems of winter driving, you

should follow these suggestions:

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be

necessary to use snow tires or to install tire

chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,

it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size

and type to the original equipment tires. Failure

to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your car. Speeding, rapid accelera-

tion, sudden brake applications, and sharp

turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking to the

fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on

snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.

You need to keep sufficient distance between

the vehicle in front and your vehicle. Also, apply

the brake gently. It should be noted that installing

tire chains on the tire will provide a greater

driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTE:

Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check

state laws before fitting tire chains.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-

Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washer system

from freezing, add an approved window washer

anti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-

tions on the container. Window washer anti-

freeze is available from Hyundai dealers and

most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine

coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these

may damage the paint finish.

C160I01A-AAT

Don’t Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can

freeze in the engaged position. This is most

likely to happen when there is an accumulation

of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes

or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the

parking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-

rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"

(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual

transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car

cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol Cool-

ant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality

ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It

is the only type of coolant that should be used

because it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-

ing system, lubricates the water pump and

prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-

ish your coolant in accordance with the main-

tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,

have your coolant tested to assure that its

freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures

anticipated during the winter.

C160D01F-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery

system. Visually inspect the battery and cables

as described in Section 6 (See page 6-23). The

level of charge in your battery can be checked

by your Hyundai dealer or a service station.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Neces-

sary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower

viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold

weather. See Section 9 for recommendations.

If you aren’t sure what weight oil you should use,

consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160F01F-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-

tion 6 (See page 6-10) and replace them if

necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and

components to be sure they are not cracked,

worn or damaged in any way.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key

opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with

an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If

the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to

thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the

heated key with care to avoid injury.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

18 HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C160J01A-AAT

Don’t Let Ice and Snow Accumulate

Underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build

up under the fenders and interfere with the

steering. When driving in severe winter condi-

tions where this may happen, you should peri-

odically check underneath the car to be sure the

movement of the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather where

you drive your car, you should carry appropri-

ate emergency equipment. Some of the items

you may want to carry include tire chains, tow

straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,

sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,

gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C170A02A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-

tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result in

overheating and possible failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may

result in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation

pressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:

High speed travel consumes more fuel than

urban motoring. Do not forget to check both

engine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:

A loose or damaged drive belt may result in

overheating of the engine.

!WARNING:

o Underinflated or overinflated tires can

cause poor handling, loss of vehicle

control, and sudden tire failure leading

to accidents, injuries, and even death.

Always check tires are properly inflated

before driving. Refer to pages 8-2~8-3

for proper tire pressures and further

information.

o Driving on tires with no or insufficient

tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can

result in loss of vehicle control, colli-

sions, injury, and even death. Worn-out

tires should be replaced as soon as

possible and should never be used for

driving. Always check tire tread before

driving your car.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C190C03S-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed and

operating correctly.

NOTE:

If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car will

require more frequent maintenance due to

the additional load. See "Maintenance Un-

der Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

C190A01S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, you

should first check with your State's Department

of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-

quirements.

Since laws vary from State to State, the require-

ments for towing trailers, cars, other types of

vehicles, or apparatus may differ. Ask your

Hyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:

Do not do any towing with your car during

its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order to

allow the engine to properly break in. Fail-

ure to heed this caution may result in seri-

ous engine or transaxle damage.

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,

making sure that its location is compatible with

that of the trailer or vehicle being towed. Use a

quality non-equalizing hitch which distributes

the tongue load uniformly throughout the chas-

sis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the car

and installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT

USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY

INSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THAT

ATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-

tion and always keep them clean. When driving

during the day in conditions of poor visibility, it

is helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.

This enables you to be seen, as well as to see.

USE OF LIGHTS

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between your

vechile and the trailer or vehicle you are towing

fail, the trailer or vehicle could wander danger-

ously across other lanes of traffic and ultimately

leave the roadway. To eliminate this potentially

dangerous situation, safety chains, attached

between your car and the trailer or towed

vehicle, are required in most states.

C190E02GK-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

C190E01L

Tongue load Total trailer weight

Tongue loads can be increased or decreased

by redistributing the load in the trailer.

This can be verified by checking the total weight

of the loaded trailer and then checking the load

on the tongue.

NOTE:

1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% of

the trailer load should be in the front half

on the trailer and the remaining 40% in

the rear.

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailer

must not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the

vehicle identification plate (see page 8-

1). The total gross vehicle weight is the

combined weight of the vehicle, driver,

all passengers and their luggage, cargo,

hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-

tional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight must not

exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-

cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possible

that your towing package does not ex-

ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.

Improper trailer loading and/or too much

luggage in the trunk can overload the

rear axle. Redistribute the load and check

the axle weight again.

C190E02L

Gross axle weight Gross vehicle weight

CAUTION:

o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.

o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 6%) pay close attention to the

engine coolant temperature gauge to

ensure the engine does not overheat. If

the needle of the coolant temperature

gauge moves across the dial towards

"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as

it is safe to do so, and allow the engine

to idle until it cools down. You may

proceed once the engine has cooled

sufficiently.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocks

at each of the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your

vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the

trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the

brakes are working. This lets you check

your electrical connection at the same time.

10.During your trip, occasionally check to be

sure that the load is secure, and that the

lights and any trailer brakes are still working.

11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or

sudden stops.

12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.

13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakes

to overheat, resulting in reduced braking

efficiency.

14.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear

and use the engine braking effect.

When ascending a long grade, downshift the

transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed

to reduce chances of engine overloading

and/or overheating.

15.If you have to stop while going uphill, do not

hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the

accelerator. This can cause the automatic

transaxle to overheat. Use the parking brake

or footbrake.

NOTE:

When towing check transaxle fluid more

frequently.

CAUTION:

The following specifications are recom-

mended when towing a trailer. The loaded

trailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-

ues in the chart below.

!WARNING:

o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steering

and braking performance causing a

crash which could cause serious injury

or death.

o Towing a trailer affected vehicle han-

dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailer

and allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery and

windy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-

ing up and down hills.

Lbs. (kg)

Maximum Towable Weight

Trailer

1000 (453)

Tongue

100 (45)

C190F01S-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chain

connections as well as proper operation of

the trailer running lights, brake lights, and

turn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

conditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiency and

electrical charging performance, do not use

fifth gear (manual transaxle) or overdrive

(automatic transaxle).

5. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure of all

tires on the trailer and your car. Low tire

pressure can seriously affect the handling.

Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-

fected by crosswind and buffeting.

When being passed by a large vehicle, keep

a constant speed and steer straight ahead.

If there is too much wind buffeting, slow down

to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

8. When parking your car and trailer, especially

on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal

precautions. Turn your front wheel into the

curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the

transaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

CAUTION:

If overheating should occur when towing,

(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),

taking the following action may reduce or

eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.

2. Reduce highway speed.

3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.

4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idle

the engine at a higher speed.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01GK-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030B01GK

The tire label located on the driver's

side of the center pillar outer panel

gives the original tire size, cold tire

pressures recommended for your ve-

hicle, the number of people that can be

in your vehicle and vehicle capacity

weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:

700 lbs (317 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped

with a trailer, the combined weight in-

cludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total: 4 persons

(Front seat: 2 persons,

Rear seat: 2 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum num-

ber of occupants including a driver,

your vehicle may carry.

However the seating capacity may be

reduced based upon the weight of all of

the occupants, and the weight of the

cargo being carried or towed. Do not

overload the vehicle as there is a limit

to the total weight, or load limit including

occupants and cargo, the vehicle can

carry.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(498 kg)

Example 1

Item

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX

kilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =

650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

ABC

Towing capacity:

Towing capacity is the maximum trailer

weight including its cargo weight, your

vehicle can tow. See the section "Trailer

or Vehicle Towing" for specifications

about the trailer weight.

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle will

increase or decrease depending on the

weight and the number of occupants

and the tongue load, if your vehicle is

equipped with a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX pounds'' on your

vehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

172 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3 Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading

information label for specific informa-

tion about your vehicle's capacity weight

and seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers and

cargo should never exceed your

vehicle's capacity weight.

ABC

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

ABC

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

This label also tells you the maximum

weights that can be supported by the

front and rear axles, called Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the

actual loads on your front and rear

axles, you need to go to a weigh station

and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can

help you with this. Be sure to spread out

your load equally on both sides of the

centerline.

WARNING:

o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, the GAWR for either the

front or rear axle and vehicle ca-

pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-

ings can cause an accident or

vehicle damage. You can calcu-

late the weight of your load by

weighing the items (or people)

before putting them in the vehicle.

Be careful not to overload your

vehicle.

C190G03JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on the

driver's side of the center piller outer

panel.

The label shows the maximum allow-

able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.

This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-

cludes the weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01A

WARNING:

o Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either the

maximum front or rear GAWR and

vehicle capacity weight. If you do,

parts, including tires on your ve-

hicle can break, and it can change

the way your vehicle handles and

braking ability. This could cause

you to lose control and crash.

Also, overloading can shorten the

life of your vehicle.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

! ! WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehicle

can strike and injure people in a

sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the

weight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle above the tops

of the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat folded

down unless necessary.

NOTE:

o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would not

be covered by your warranty. Do

not overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-

ponents to get added durability

might not change your weight rat-

ings. Ask your dealer to help you

load your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how much

cargo and installed equipment your

vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –

like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-

thing else – they more as fast as the

vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn

quickly, or if there is a crash, the items

will keep going and can cause an injury

if they strikes the driver or a passenger.

WARNING:

o Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your

vehicle's tires and possible tire

failure that could lead to a crash.

o Overloading your vehicle can

cause increased stopping dis-

tances that could lead to a crash.

o A crash resulting from poor han-

dling vehicle damage, tire failure,

or increased stopping distances

could result in serious injury or

death.

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2

Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3

If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4

Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5

If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6

Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6

If Your Vehicle Must be Towed ................................... 3-12

Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-13

If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-14

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn’t Turn Over or Turns

Over Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does

Not Start

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition, coils and spark plugs.

Reconnect any that may be disconnected or

loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-

ment.

4. If the engine still does not to start, call a

Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assis-

tance.

D010D01A-AAT

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a

straight line. Move cautiously off the road to

a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer or

seek other qualified assistance.

WARNING:

If the engine will not start, do not push or

pull the car to start it. This could result in a

collision or cause other damage. In addi-

tion, push or pull starting may cause the

catalytic converter to be overloaded and

create a fire hazard.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, be

sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"

and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be sure

they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or

goes out when you operate the starter, the

battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be sure

they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See

instructions for "Jump Starting".

D010B01GK

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

JUMP STARTING

o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,

follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in another

vehicle, be sure the two vehicles are not

touching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-

sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in the

exact location shown on the previous page.

First, attach one clamp of the jumper cable

to the positive (+) post or cable of the dis-

charged battery. Then attach the other end

of the same cable to the positive (+) post or

cable of the booster battery. Next, using the

other cable, attach one clamp to the negative

(-) post or cable of the booster battery. Then

attach the other end of that cable to a solid

metal part of the engine of the vehicle with the

discharged battery away from the battery.

Do not connect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the booster

battery and let it run for a few minutes. This

will help to assure that the booster battery is

fully charged. During the jumping operation,

run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000

rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-

charged battery using the normal starting

procedure. After the engine starts, leave the

jumper cables connected and let the engine

run at fast idle or about 2000 rpm for several

minutes.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:

The gas produced by the battery during the

jump-start operation is highly explosive. If

these instructions are not followed exactly,

serious personal injury and damage to the

vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how

to follow this procedure, seek qualified

assistance. Automobile batteries contain

sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly

corrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-

tective glasses and be careful not to get

acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

o If you should accidentally get acid on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately remove

any contaminated clothing and flush the area

with clear water for at least 15 minutes. Then

promptly obtain medical attention. If you

must be transported to an emergency facil-

ity, continue to apply water to the affected

area with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during the

jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do

not smoke or allow a spark or an open flame

in the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jump

start must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-

mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attempt

to use it for the jump start.

2.0L

HGK4001

HGK4002

Dis-

charged

battery

2.7L

Booster battery

Dis-

charged

battery

Booster battery

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!WARNING:

While the engine is running, keep hair,

hands, and clothing away from moving

parts such as the fan and drive belts to

prevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or

engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine

immediately and call the nearest Hyundai

dealer for assistance.

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be

blown out of the opening and cause seri-

ous burns.

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-

ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud

pinging or knocking and the engine is probably

too hot. If this happens and, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe

to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-

matic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and set

the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,

turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the car

or steam is coming out from the hood, stop

the engine. Do not open the hood until the

engine coolant has stopped running or the

steaming has stopped. If there is no visible

loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave

the engine running and check to be sure the

engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is

not running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is

missing. If it is not missing, check to see that

it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be

satisfactory, check for engine coolant leak-

ing from the radiator, hoses or under the car.

(If the air conditioning had been in use, it is

normal for cold water to be draining from it

when you stop).

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in the

reverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery became

discharged (because the lights were left on,

etc.), have the charging system checked by

your Hyundai dealer.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

SPARE TIRE

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-

ing, wait until the engine temperature has

returned to normal. Then, if the engine cool-

ant has been lost, carefully add water to the

reservoir (Page 6-8) to bring the fluid level in

the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-

ther signs of overheating. If overheating

happens again, call a Hyundai dealer for

assistance.

CAUTION:

Serious loss of engine coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling system and this

should be checked as soon as possible by

a Hyundai dealer.

D040A03GK-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the tem-

porary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon as

practical after installing the spare

tire, and adjust to the specified pres-

sure. The tire pressure should be

periodically checked and maintained

at the specified pressure while the

tire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/70 R16

420 kPa(60 psi)

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-

cifically designed for your car, it

should not be used on any other

vehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should not

be used on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow tires,

wheel covers or trim rings be used

with the temporary spare wheel. If

such use is attempted, damage to

these items or other car components

may occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressure

should be checked once a month

while the tire is stored.

2. The spare tire should only be used

temporarily and should be returned

to the luggage compartment as soon

as the original tire can be repaired or

replaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50

mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:

o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.

o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.

o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the car slow down while

driving straight ahead. Do not apply

the brakes immediately or attempt to

pull off the road as this may cause a

loss of control. When the car has

slowed to such a speed that it is safe

to do so, brake carefully and pull off

the road. Drive off the road as far as

possible and park on firm, level

ground. If you are on a divided high-

way, do not park in the median area

between the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on your

emergency hazard flashers, set the

parking brake and put the transaxle

in "P" (automatic) or reverse (manual

transaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.

Be sure they all get out on the side of

the car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instruc-

tions provided on the following pages.

D040B01A-AAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Remove the installation bolt to remove

the spare tire. To replace the spare tire

in its storage compartment, tighten the

bolt firmly with your fingers until there is

no more play in the spare tire.

HGK4010

!WARNING:

The temporary spare tire is for emer-

gency use only. Do not operate your

vehicle on this temporary spare at

speeds over 50 mph (80 kmh). The

original tire should be repaired or

replaced as soon as is possible to

avoid failure of the spare possibly

leading to personal injury or death.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

D060A02A-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-

ing pages can be used to rotate tires as

well as to change a flat tire. When

preparing to change a flat tire, check to

be sure the gear selector lever is in "P"

(automatic transaxle) or reverse gear

(manual transaxle) and that the parking

brake is set, then:

D060A01GK

D060B02GK-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

Remove the spare tire and remove the

jack and tool bag from the trunk.

HGK4008 The jack is located behind the right side

of luggage trim. Remove the jack cover

by unscrewing the bolts. Turn the jack

end counterclockwise to lower the jack

height by using a screw driver or wrench

bar and remove it from the bracket.

HGK4009

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placed

on firm, level ground. The jack should

be positioned as shown in the drawing.

HGK4012

D060D02A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosened

slightly before raising the car. To loosen

the nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-

terclockwise. When doing this, be sure

that the socket is seated completely

over the nut so it cannot slip off. For

maximum leverage, position the wrench

so the handle is to the left as shown in

the drawing. Then, while holding the

wrench near the end of the handle, push

down on it with steady pressure. Do not

remove the nuts at this time. Just

loosen them about one-half turn.

HGK4013

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-

site from the flat to keep the vehicle

from rolling when the car is raised on the

jack.

HGK4011

Flat tire

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

!WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it is

supported by the jack! This is very

dangerous as the jack could fall and

cause serious injury or death. No

one should stay in the car while the

jack is being used.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a bar into the wheel nut

wrench, install the bar into the jack as

shown in the drawing. To raise the

vehicle, turn the jack handle clockwise.

As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,

double check that it is properly posi-

tioned and will not slip. If the jack is on

soft ground or sand, place a board,

brick, flat stone or other object under

the base of the jack to keep it from

sinking.

HFC4022

Wrench bar

Wheel nut

wrench

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and remove

them with your fingers. Slide the wheel

off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot

roll away. To put the wheel on the hub,

pick up the spare tire, line up the holes

with the studs and slide the wheel onto

them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel

slightly and get the top hole in the wheel

lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle

the wheel back and forth until the wheel

can be slid over the other studs.

HGK4031

Raise the car high enough so that the

fully inflated spare tire can be installed.

To do this, you will need more ground

clearance than is required to remove

the flat tire.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turning

the wheel nut wrench counterclock-

wise. Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheel

nuts. Be sure the socket is seated

completely over the nut. Do not stand

HGK4014

D060H02Y-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the

studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs

and tighten them finger tight. The nuts

should be installed with their small di-

D060H01GK

wheel nuts could come loose and

cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a

wheel may result in loss of control of

the vehicle. This may cause serious

injury or death.

ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the

tire to be sure it is completely seated,

then tighten the nuts as much as pos-

sible with your fingers again.

!WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers may have

sharp edges. Handle them carefully

to avoid possible severe injury. Be-

fore putting the wheel into place, be

sure that there is nothing on the hub

or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,

etc.) that interferes with the wheel

from fitting solidly against the hub. If

there is, remove it. If there is not

good contact on the mounting sur-

face between the wheel and hub, the

D060G02GK

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D060J01FC-GAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure. If

the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the correct

pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until

it is correct. Always reinstall the valve

cap after checking or adjusting tire

pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air

may leak from the tire. If you lose a

valve cap, buy another and install it as

soon as possible.

HGK4032

on the wrench handle or use an exten-

sion pipe over the wrench handle.

Go around the wheel tightening every

other nut until they are all tight. Then

double-check each nut for tightness.

After changing wheels, have a techni-

cian tighten the wheel nuts to their

proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:

65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100kg.cm)

After you have changed wheels, al-

ways secure the flat tire in its place in

the luggage compartment and return

the jack and tools to their proper stor-

age locations.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

HGK4030

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift type

truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

3) dolly

HGK4016

CAUTION:

o When towing the vehicle, take care not to

cause damage to the bumper or under-

body of the vehicle.

o Do not tow with sling type truck as this

may cause damage to the bumper or

underbody of the vehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE

TOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be done

by your Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow

truck service. This will help assure that your

vehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-

sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-

erning towing. In any case, rather than risk

damage to your car, it is suggested that you

show this information to the tow truck operator.

Be sure that a safety chain system is used and

that all local laws are observed.

It is recommended that your vehicle be towed

with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment

with all the wheels off the ground.

!CAUTION:

o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!

o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.

o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placing the

key in the "ACC" position.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear

wheels on the ground, be sure the parking

brake is released.

NOTE:

Before towing, check the level of the auto-

matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"

range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you

cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be

used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspension

components are damaged or the vehicle is

being towed with the front wheels on the

ground, use a towing dolly under the front

wheels.

o Manual Transaxle:

If you do not use a towing dolly, place the

ignition key in the "ACC" position and put the

transaxle in "N (Neutral)". HGK4017

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle should

never be towed from the rear with the front

wheels on the ground. This can cause se-

rious damage to the transaxle. Be sure to

use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

EMERGENCY TOWING

D080D02A-AAT

For emergency towing when no commercial

tow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,

chain or strap to one of the towing hooks under

the front /rear of your car. Do not attempt to tow

your vehicle in this manner on any unpaved

surface. This could result in serious damage to

your car.

Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,

drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-

aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is in

neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine

off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine

running). A driver must be in the towed car to

steer it and operate the brakes.

HGK4018

Front

Rear

CAUTION:

Do not tow with the key removed or in the

"LOCK" position when towing from the

rear without a towing dolly.

o Automatic Transaxle:

Be sure to use a towing dolly under the front

wheels.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle be

towed with all the wheels off the ground.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealers

can make you a new key if you have your key

number.

If you lock the keys inside your car and you

cannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealers

can use special tools to open the door for you.

!CAUTION:

o If the car is being towed with all four

wheels on the ground, it can be towed

only from the front. Be sure that the

transaxle is in neutral. Do not tow at

speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h)

and for more than 15 miles (25 km).

o Be sure the steering is unlocked by plac-

ing the key in the "ACC" position. A

driver must be in the towed vehicle to

operate the steering and brakes.

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2

To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2

Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3

Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep

your car clean and free of corrosive materials.

Attention to the underside of the car is particu-

larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — where

road salts are used, near the ocean, areas

with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you

should take extra care to prevent corrosion.

In winter, hose off the underside of your car

at least once a month and be sure to clean

the underside thoroughly when winter is

over.

o When cleaning underneath the car, give

particular attention to the components under

the fenders and other areas that are hidden

from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening

the accumulated mud rather than washing it

away will accelerate corrosion rather than

prevent it. Water under high pressure and

steam are particularly effective in removing

accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from getting

started by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-

sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-

rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-

larly when temperatures are just above freez-

ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is

kept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-

ture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow

to dry and holds moisture in contact with the

vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it

can still retain the moisture and promote corro-

sion.

High temperatures can also accelerate corro-

sion of parts that are not properly ventilated so

the moisture can be dispersed. For all these

reasons, it is particularly important to keep your

car clean and free of mud or accumulations of

other materials. This applies not only to the

visible surfaces but particularly to the underside

of the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularly

exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-

tection is particularly important. Some of the

common causes of accelerated corrosion are

road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air

and industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your

car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to

accumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings by

stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes

and dents which leave unprotected metal

exposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from

Corrosion

By using the most advanced design and con-

struction practices to combat corrosion,

Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality,

However, this is only part of the job. To achieve

the long-term corrosion resistance your

Hyundai can deliver, the owner’s cooperation

and assistance is also required.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don’t Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and

carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the

mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.

Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-

ing materials or chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper contain-

ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,

flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don’t park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated

garage. This creates a favorable environment

for corrosion. This is particularly true if you

wash your car in the garage or drive it into the

garage when it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-

ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so

moisture is dispersed.

E030A01GK-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hot

from being in the sun. Always wash your car in

the shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive and

can scratch the paint if it is not removed. Air

pollution or acid rain may damage the paint and

trim through chemical action if pollutants are

allowed to remain in contact with the surface. If

you live near the ocean or in an area where road

salts or dust control chemicals are used, you

should pay particular attention to the underside

of the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dust

and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driven

through mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-

oughly clean the underside as well. Use a hard

direct stream of water to remove accumulations

of mud or corrosive materials. High pressure

car washes may cause water to enter your

vehicle. Use a good quality car-washing solu-

tion and follow the manufacturer's directions on

the package. These are available at your

Hyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't use

strong household detergents, gasoline, strong

solvents or abrasive cleaning powders as these

may damage the finish.

Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequently

and don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.

For stubborn spots, dampen them frequently

and remove them a little at a time.

o When cleaning lower door panels, rocker

panels and frame members, be sure that

drain holes are kept open so that moisture

can escape and not be trapped inside to ac-

celerate corrosion.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-

sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If

bare metal is showing through, the attention of

a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-

rosive and may damage painted surfaces in just

a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as

soon as possible.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again when

water no longer beads on a clean surface but

spreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishing

or waxing or using a combination cleaner and

wax. Use a good quality commercial product

and follow the manufacturer’s directions on the

container. Polish and wax the bright trim pieces

as well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don’t use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-

sive cleaning agents. These can damage the

finish of the car. To remove road tar, use

turpentine on a clean, soft cloth or commercially

available bug and tar remover. Be gentle.

To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warm

water and mild soap or car-washing solution.

Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lost

its luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,

use touch-up paint to cover them to prevent

corrosion. To protect the paintwork of the car

against corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai

(at least once a month). Give special attention

to the removal of salt, mud and other sub-

stances on the underside of the splashboards

of the car. Make sure that the outlets and the

underside of the doors are open. Paint damage

can be caused by small accumulation of tar,

industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects and

bird droppings, when not removed immediately.

If water alone is not strong enough to remove the

accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-

tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washing

to remove the solution. Never allow the solution

to dry on the painted surfaces.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or

soapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean

sponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mild

soap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasive

cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by

cleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-

num is subject to corrosion, be sure to give

aluminum alloy wheels special attention in win-

ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the

wheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. If

soapy water dries on the finish, streaking will

result.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,

you may find it necessary to rinse each section

immediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamois

or soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for drying

the car is to remove water from the car so it will

dry without water spots. Don't rub, this can

damage the finish.

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery

(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholstered

surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and

dirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned

off or it may work into the surface of the leather,

causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleaned

when necessary. Washing leather thoroughly

with soap and water will keep your leather

lustrous, beautiful and ensure you have many

years of wear.

Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mild

soap and lukewarm water, work up a good

lather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe clean

with a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.

Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils are

incorporated through processing that none need

be applied during the life of the leather. Oil

applied to the finished surface will in no way help

the leather and may do more harm than good.

Varnishes and furniture polishes should never

be used under any conditions.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loose

dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then apply

a solution of mild soap or detergent and water

using a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to

stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipe

with a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt

stains are not removed, repeat this procedure

until the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-

line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-

ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-

serve the appearance of the bumpers on your

Hyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte or

hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If you

do, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-

faces. They are made of soft plastic and the

surface can be damaged if mistreated. Do

not use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water

and mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-

peratures. For example, if you have your car

repainted, do not leave the bumpers on the

car if the car is going to be placed in a high-

temperature paint booth.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or sponge

with mild soap or detergent and warm water. Do

not use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-

sive materials on the seat belts as this may

weaken the fabric.

While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-

cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs of

damage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners of

this type are available in aerosol cans in liquid

form or powder. Read the instructions and

follow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleaner

with the appropriate attachment, remove as

much dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply

the foam following the manufacturer’s direc-

tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add

water. These cleaners work best when the

carpet is kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care of your

car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner on

the windows. However, when cleaning the in-

side of the rear window be careful not to damage

the rear window defroster wiring.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2

Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4

Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6

Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-

form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill the

fuel tank. A list of these items will be found on

page 6-4.

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,

adjustments and replacements that are listed in

the maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.

These procedures must be performed at the

intervals shown in the maintenance schedule to

assure that your warranty remains in effect.

Although it is strongly recommended that they

be performed by the trained technicians at your

Hyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-

formed at any qualified service facility.

It is suggested that genuine Hyundai service

parts be used for any required repairs or re-

placements. Other parts of equivalent quality

such as engine oil, engine coolant, manual or

auto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on which

are not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company or

its distributor may be used without affecting

your warranty coverage but you should always

be sure these are equivalent to the quality of the

original Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Hand-

book provides further information about your

warranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest number

of miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,

certain maintenance procedures must be per-

formed. Although careful design and engineer-

ing have reduced these to a minimum, those that

are required are of the utmost importance.

It is your responsibility to have these mainte-

nance procedures performed to comply with

the terms of the warranties covering your new

Hyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied with

your new vehicle provides further information

about these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundai

can be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedures

o General checks

o Do-it-yourself maintenance

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few tools

that are required and want to take the time to do

so, you can inspect and service a number of

items. For more information about doing it your-

self, see Section 6.

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

REQUIREMENTS

F020A02S-AAT

o Inspection should be performed any time a

malfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control system

services should be retained to demonstrate

compliance with conditions of the emissions

system warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000

km), continue to follow the prescribed main-

tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-

ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,

keep copies of the service records in your

glovebox. This will help ensure that you can

document that the required procedures have

been performed to keep your warranties in

effect. This is especially important when

service is not performed by an authorized

Hyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenance

and repairs, you may find it helpful to have

an official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy of

this publication may be purchased at your

Hyundai dealer's parts department.

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B04GK-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

VALVE CLEARENCE (2.0 L)

FUEL TANK AIRFILTER

No.

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

22.5

37.5

52.5

67.5

108

120

82.5

132

144

97.5

156

105

168

112.5

180

120

192

127.5

204

102

135

216

108

142.5

228

114

150

240

120

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services

to protect your emission warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Note :

*1 - FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"

F030C02GK-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

No.

DESCRIPTION

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, GENERATOR AND A/CON)

COOLANT

TIMING BELT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID & CLUTCH FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

22.5

37.5

52.5

67.5

108

120

82.5

132

144

97.5

156

105

168

112.5

180

120

192

127.5

204

102

135

216

108

142.5

228

114

150

240

120

SEE NOTE *1

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A04GK-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate

maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

TIMING BELT

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS,

PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE ITEM

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

EVERY 40,000 MILES (64,000 KM) OR 48 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVING

CONDITION

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

B, C, D, E, F, G

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal tempera

ture or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)

G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and

Connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-

tions for leakage and damage. Have a trained

technician replace any damaged or leaking

parts immediately.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the

intervals specified in the maintenance sched-

ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-

tions, more frequent oil and filter changes are

required.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the

vehicle may be driven, damage the emission

system and cause hard starting. If an exces-

sive amount of foreign matter accumulates in

the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement

more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for

several minutes, and check for leaks at the

connections. Fuel filters should be installed by

trained technicians.

F060F02A-AAT

o Crankcase Ventilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of

heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and

brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,

and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.

Particular attention should be paid to examine

those hose surfaces nearest to high heat

sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the

hoses do not come in contact with any heat

source, sharp edges or moving component

which might cause heat damage or mechanical

wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as

clamps and couplings, to make sure they are

secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses

should be replaced immediately if there is any

evidence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060H01A-AAT

o Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-

mended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be

inspected at those intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new

vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-

placed.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the

correct heat range.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance (2.0L)

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine

vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified

technician should perform the operation.

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

F060B02A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,

cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and

replace if necessary. Drive belts should be

checked periodically for proper tension and

adjusted as necessary.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals

specified in the maintenance schedule.

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt for

damage and deformation. Replace any dam-

aged parts immediately.

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual transaxle oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according to

the maintenance schedule.

NOTE:

If the oil level is low, check for possible leaks

before adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070G03A-AAT

o Brake Fluid & Clutch Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-

voir. The level should be between "MIN" and

"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use

only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3

or DOT 4.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums and Linings/

Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings for

scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,

and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake

system including the parking brake lever and

cables. For detailed service procedures, refer

to the Shop Manual.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,

cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace

any deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-

ately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT” range of

the dipstick, after the engine and transaxle are

at normal operating temperature. Check the

automatic transaxle fluid level with the engine

running and the transaxle in neutral, with the

parking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAI

GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK

ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III

specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.

when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrong

ATF may result in damage to the ATM.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for

run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and

hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.

Start the engine and listen carefully for any

exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or

replace parts as necessary.

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-

ness or damage. Retighten to the specified

torque.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check

for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check

the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,

cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses for

leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or

leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power

steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-

cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.

Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for

cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any

damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the

grease.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-

tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-

ditioning performance according to the relevant

shop manual if necessary.

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2

General Checks ............................................................ 6-4

Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5

Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-6

Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-7

Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-10

Checking the Transaxle Oil (manual) ......................... 6-12

Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-13

Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-15

Checking the Clutch Fluid ........................................... 6-16

Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-17

Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-21

Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-22

Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-23

Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-26

Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-26

Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-28

Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-37

Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-38

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010B01GK-GAT

(2.0 DOHC CVVT)

HGK5002

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Brake booster

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed)

5. Relay box

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap

7. Power steering fluid reservoir

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Engine oil level dipstick

10.Radiator cap

11.Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick

(If installed)

12.Air cleaner

13.Battery

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the engine,

you should handle tools and other heavy

objects carefully so that the plastic rocker

cover of the engine is not damaged.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G010C01GK-GAT

(2.7 V6)

HGK5001

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Brake booster

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air Cleaner

5. Relay box

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10.Engine oil filler cap

11.Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick

(If installed)

12.Battery

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the engine,

you should handle tools and other heavy

objects carefully so that the plastic rocker

cover of the engine is not damaged.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

4GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each time

when the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operation

o Windshield wiper operation

o Horn operation

o Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, if installed)

o Steering operation and condition

o Mirror condition and operation

o Turn signal operation

o Accelerator pedal operation

o Brake operation, including parking brake

o Manual transaxle operation, including clutch

operation

o Automatic transaxle operation, including

"Park" mechanism operation

o Seat control condition and operation

o Seat belt condition and operation

o Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operate

correctly or appears to be functioning incor-

rectly, inspect it carefully and seek assistance

from your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and condition

o Wheel condition and wheel nut torque

o Exhaust system condition

o Light condition and operation

o Windshield glass condition

o Wiper blade condition

o Paint condition and body corrosion

o Fluid leaks

o Door and hood lock condition

o Tire pressure and condition (including spare

tire)

G020A01A-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and condition

o Transaxle fluid level and condition

o Brake fluid level

o Clutch fluid level

o Engine coolant level

o Windshield washer fluid level

o Accessory drive belt condition

o Engine coolant hose condition

o Fluid leaks (on or below components)

o Power steering fluid level

o Battery condition

o Air filter condition

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G030C02A-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

HGK5004

2.0L 2.7L

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine to

the normal operating temperature and be sure

your car is parked on level ground. Turn the

engine off.

Wait 5 minutes, then remove the dipstick, wipe

it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw it

again. Then note the highest level the oil has

reached on the dipstick. It should be between

the upper ("F") and lower ("L") range.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance and

service of the engine. It is suggested that you

check the oil level at least once a week in normal

use and more often if you are on a trip or driving

in severe conditions.

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet the following

classification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

NOTE:

o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-

30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferred

regardless of regional option and en-

gine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 en-

gine oil is not available, secondary rec-

ommended engine oil for correspond-

ing temperature range can be used.

WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiator

hose when adding the engine oil as it may

be hot enough to burn you.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,

add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do not

overfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is

equal to about 1 quart of oil.

G040A04GK-AAT

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

filler cap.

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen the

drain plug by turning it counterclockwise with

a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a

drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it

drains out, then remove the drain plug.

WARNING:

Be very careful when draining the engine oil

as it may be hot enough to burn you!

G030D01A-AAT

Adding Oil

HGK5005

2.0L 2.7L

The engine oil and filter should be changed at

those intervals specified in the maintenance

schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven

in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter

changes are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter is

as follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set the

parking brake. Start the engine and let it

warm up until the needle on the coolant

temperature gauge moves above the lowest

mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear

selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse

gear (manual transaxle).

G040A03E

G040A01B

Oil filler cap

Oil filter

2.0L

2.7L

Oil filler cap

Oil filter

Drain plug

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING AND CHANGING THE

ENGINE COOLANT

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the

engine coolant is under pressure and may

erupt through the opening if the cap is

removed. You could be seriously burned if

you do not observe this precaution. Do not

remove the radiator cap until the radiator is

cool to the touch.

4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace

the drain plug using a new gasket and re-

tighten by turning it clockwise.

Tightening torque is:

4.5 ~ 4.0 kgf.m (2.0L)

4.5 ~ 3.5 kgf.m (2.7L)

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-

clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the proper

size. A certain amount of oil will come out

when you remove the filter. So be sure to

have your drain pan in place underneath it.

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the

instructions on the carton or on the filter itself.

Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :

1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m)

Be sure that the mounting surface on the

engine is clean and that the old gasket is

removed completely. Lubricate the new

gasket on the filter with clean engine oil

before installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.

8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended

engine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-

ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil using by

a funnel. Do not overfill! Engine damage

may occur if overfilled.

9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil

is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:

Always dispose of used engine oil in an

environmentally acceptable manner. It is

suggested that it be placed in a sealed

container and taken to a service station for

reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the

ground or put it in with the household

trash.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

This product contains a chemical known to

the State of California to cause cancer.

Used engine oil may cause irritation or

cancer of the skin if left in contact with the

skin for prolonged periods of time. Used

engine oil contains chemicals that have

caused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-

ways protect your skin by washing your

hands thoroughly with soap and warm

water as soon as possible after handling

used oil.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant Level

G050D02A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed at those

intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance

schedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:

Engine coolant can damage the finish of

your car. If you spill engine coolant on the

car, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-

ing brake and remove the radiator cap when

cool.

2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.

Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow all

the engine coolant to drain from the cooling

system, then securely close the drain cock.

3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the

cooling system in your car. Then, following

the manufacturer’s directions on the engine

coolant container, add the appropriate quan-

tity of coolant to the radiator.

The coolant level can be seen on the side of the

plastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-

ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines on

the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the level

is below the "L" mark, add engine coolant to

bring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,

inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluid

level frequently. If the level drops again, visit

your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and

diagnosis of the reason.

HGK4006

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a

50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant should

be compatible with aluminum engine parts.

Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives should

not be used. The cooling system must be

maintained with the correct concentration and

type of engine coolant to prevent freezing and

corrosion. Never allow the concentration of

antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go below

the 35% level, or damage to the cooling system

may result. For proper concentration when

adding or replacing the engine coolant, refer to

the following table.

Ambient

temperature

°F ( °G)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

Water

Antifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

!WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine

coolant temperature and may sometimes

operate even when the engine is not run-

ning. Use extreme caution when working

near the blades of the coolant fan so that

you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.

As the engine coolant temperature de-

creases, the fan will automatically shut off.

This is a normal condition.

4. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-

out pressing down on it, until it stops. This

relieves any pressure remaining in the cool-

ing system. And remove the radiator cap by

pushing down and turning counterclock-

wise.

Now fill the radiator with clean demineralized

or distilled water. Continue to add clean

demineralized or distilled water in small quan-

tities until the fluid level stays up in the

radiator neck.

G050D03E

5. Start the engine, top off the radiator with

water and then add coolant to the reservoir

until the level is between "L" and "F".

6. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps and

check to be sure the drain cocks are fully

closed and not leaking.

G050D04E

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

10 CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER

FILTER

G070A01E-AAT

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around the

cover. When this is done, the cover can be lifted

off, the old filter removed and the new filter put

in its place. Genuine Hyundai Replacement

Parts are recommended.

CAUTION:

o Operating your vehicle without a proper

air filter in place can result in excessive

engine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, be

careful that dust or dirt does not enter

the air intake. These may result in dam-

age to the air cleaner filter.

HGK5010

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A03A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspected

from time to time and cleaned to remove accu-

mulations of road film or other debris. To clean

the wiper blades and arms, use a clean sponge

or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.

If the wipers continue to streak or smear the

glass, replace them with Genuine Hyundai

Replacement Parts or their equivalent.

G080A02GK

!CAUTION:

o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear of the

wiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contact

with petroleum products such as engine

oil, gasoline etc.

o When the wiper blade is freezed in winter

or the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the

wiper may not operate for ten minutes.

This isn't a mechanical trouble but the

function protecting the wiper by operat-

ing circuit breaker inside of the wiper

motor.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and

lower the wiper blade at the level of the wiper

arm as shown in the drawing.

2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear an

audible "click" to engage in the end of the

wiper arm.

NOTE:

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the

windshield.

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull up it.

To install the wiper blade

HHR5049

HHR5050

G080B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise the wiper to

the vertical.

To remove the wiper blade

1. Push down the wiper blade with the locking clip

(1) pressed to detach it from the wiper arm.

HHR5048

(1)

HHR5051

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G100A04GK-AAT

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxle

should be checked at those intervals specified

in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF

75W/85 (API GL-4) or equivalents in the manual

transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual transaxle:

5 speed: 2.27 U.S. quarts (2.15L)

6 speed: 2.32 U.S. quarts (2.2L)

HGK5009

Filler plug

Drain plug

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL

(MANUAL)

CAUTION:

o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer system

because it will damage the car’s finish.

o The washer should not be operated if

the washer reservoir is empty. This can

damage the washer fluid pump.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,

use windshield washer antifreeze.

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G090A03A-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the

windshield washer system.

A good quality washer fluid should be used to fill

the washer reservoir. The fluid level should be

checked more frequently during inclement

weather or whenever the washer system is in

more frequent use.

The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2 U.S.

quarts (3.0 Liters).

HGK5014

WARNING:

o Windshield washer fluid agents contain

some amounts of alcohol and can be

flammable under certain circumstances.

Do not allow sparks or flame to contact

the washer fluid or the washer fluid

reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or its

occupants could occur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to

humans and animals. Do not drink wind-

shield washer fluid. Serious injury or

death could occur.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

!WARNING:

It is always better to check the transaxle oil

level when the engine is cool or cold. If the

engine is hot, you should exercise great

caution to avoid burning yourself on hot

engine or exhaust parts.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE

FLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle should

be checked at those intervals specified in the

vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:

Automatic transaxle fluid is basically red

color. As driving distance increases, the

fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is

a normal condition and you should not

judge the need to replace based upon the

changing color.

You must replace the automatic transaxle

fluid in accordance with intervals specified

in the vehicle maintenance schedule in

section 5.

NOTE:

It is recommended that the manual transaxle

fluid should be checked by an authorized

Hyundai dealer.

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially

designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE

ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP

III or other brands meeting the SP III specifica-

tion approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damage

caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by

your new vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:

Use of aftermarket ATF additives may cause

damage to the automatic transaxle. Only

use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIA-

MOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other

brands meeting the SP III specification ap-

proved by Hyundai Motor Co.. If you are

having your vehicle serviced at a facility

other than a Hyundai dealer, verify ATF is

used for your vehicle.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,

reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, then

remove it again. Now check the fluid level on

the dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" range

on the dipstick.

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnel

to add transaxle fluid through the dipstick

tube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.

Do not overfill.

G110D02Y-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the parking

brake engaged. When the transaxle fluid level

is checked, the transaxle fluid should be at

normal operating temperature and the engine

idling.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes and

move the gear selector lever from "P" to each

of its other positions — "R", "N", "D" — and then

return to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,

long hair and clothing clear of any moving

parts.

HGK3025

HGK5007

2.0L 2.7L

G110C02Y-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is

8.2 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters).

WARNING:

The transaxle fluid level should be checked

when the engine is at normal operating

temperature. This means that the engine,

radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot.

Exercise great care not to burn yourself

during this procedure.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

HGK5008

Fluid level should be within this range

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine

coolant temperature and may sometimes

operate even when the engine is not run-

ning. Use extreme caution when working

near the blades of the cooling fan, so that

you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.

As the engine coolant temperature de-

creases, the fan will automatically shut off.

This is a normal condition.

CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:

Because brakes are essential to the safe

operation of the car, it is suggested that

they be checked and inspected by your

Hyundai dealer. The brakes should be

checked and inspected for wear at those

intervals specified in the vehicle mainte-

nance schedule in Section 5.

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:

Use caution when handling brake fluid. It

can damage your vision if it gets into your

eyes. It will also damage your vehicle’s

paint if spilled on it and not removed imme-

diately.

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your braking

system. Follow the instructions printed on the

container.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

16 CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

G130A01S-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid

The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder

should be checked when performing other un-

der hood services. The system should be

checked for leakage at the same time.

Check to make certain that the clutch fluid level

is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level

markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.

Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system

which should be inspected and repaired imme-

diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

HGK5013

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should

be checked periodically. The level should be

between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side

of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the

"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to

"MAX". Do not overfill.

HGK5012 To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt, then

unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour the

recommended fluid into the reservoir. Do not

overfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-

voir and tighten.

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

!WARNING:

Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damage

your vision if it gets into your eyes. Use only

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a

sealed container. Do not allow the fluid can

or reservoir to remain open any longer than

required. This will prevent entry of dirt and

moisture which can damage the brake sys-

tem and cause improper operation.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G130B02A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT

3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. The

reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid

contamination from foreign matter or moisture.

NOTE:

Do not allow any other liquids to contami-

nate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.

WARNING:

Use caution when handling brake fluid. It

can damage your vision if you get it in your

eyes. It will also damage your vehicle’s

paint if spilled on it and not removed imme-

diately.

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engine

radiator) should be checked periodically for

accumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.

These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-

ficiency. When removing such accumulations,

brush or hose them away carefully to avoid

bending the cooling fins.

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in the

system, the air conditioning should be run for at

least 10 minutes each week. This is particularly

important during cool weather when the air

conditioning system is not otherwise in use.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-

tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle for

several minutes with the air conditioning set

at the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is

not cold, have the air conditioning system

inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:

Running the air conditioning system for

extended periods of time with a low refrig-

erant level may damage the compressor.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

18 CHANGING THE CLIMATE CON-

TROL AIR FILTER

G145A03GK-GAT

(In front of blower unit) (If installed)

The climate control air filter is located in front of

the evaporator unit behind the glove box.

It helps to decrease the amount of pollutants

entering the car.

1. Remove the mounting screws on the down-

side of the glove box.

HGK2111

G140D01A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt When the air conditioning is being used regu-

larly, the compressor drive belt tension should

be checked at least once a month with the

engine turned off.

To check the drive belt tension, press down on

the belt halfway between the engine crankshaft

and compressor pulleys. Pressing with your

finger, you should not be able to deflect this belt

anymore than 1/3 of an inch. If you have the

instruments to check it, with a force of 22

lb.(98N), the deflection should be 0.315 inches

(approx 8.0 mm). If the belt is too loose, have it

adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

Crankshaft pulley HTB219

A/C

Tension pulley

0.315 in.

(8mm)

2.0L

G190A02B

A/C

comp.

Crankshaft pulley

Power steering

Auto tensioner

Generator

2.7 L

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2. Open the glove box and remove the mount-

ing screws on the upside of the glove box.

3. Remove the filter cover.

HGK2112 HGK2114

4. Replace the climate control air filter with a

new one.

5. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-

bly.

HGK2115

CAUTION:

Be sure to install the climate control air filter

in the direction of the arrow sign. Other-

wise, it may cause noise or deterioration.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G170A01A-AAT

Brake Pedal

With the engine off, press down on the brake

pedal several times to reduce the vacuum in the

brake booster.

Then, using your hand, press down slowly on

the brake pedal until you feel a change in

resistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.

The free-play should be within the limits speci-

fied in the illustration. If it is not, have it inspected

by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re-

paired if necessary.

HXGS508

0.12~0.31 in.

(3~8 mm)

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY

G150A01A-AAT

Steering Wheel

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop the

car with the wheels pointed straight ahead and

gently move the steering wheel back and forth.

Use very light finger pressure and be sensitive

to changes in resistance that mark the limits of

the free-play. If the free-play is greater than

specified, have it inspected by your Hyundai

dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

HGK5019

1.18 in.

(30 mm)

G160A01A-AAT

Clutch Pedal

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutch

pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This

is the clutch pedal free-play. The free-play

should be within the limits specified in the illus-

tration. If it is not, have it inspected by your

Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if

necessary.

G160A01E

0.24 ~ 0.51 in.

(6~13 mm)

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

CLEARANCE

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G190A01A-AATG180A01A-AAT

You need a helper to check the brake pedal

clearance. With the engine running, have your

helper press down on the brake pedal several

times and then hold it down with a force of about

110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-

ance is the distance from the top surface of the

brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the

floor mat.

If the brake pedal clearance is not within the

limits specified in the illustration, have it in-

spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted

or repaired if necessary.

G180A01L

1.78 in. (45.1 mm)

Tension

pulley

Generator

G190A01GK

Power

steering

Water pump

pulley

A/C

comp.

2.0L

G190A02B

A/C

comp.

Crankshaft pulley

Power steering

Auto tensioner

Generator

2.7L

Crankshaft pulley

Drive belts should be checked periodically for

proper tension and adjusted if necessary. At the

same time, belts should be examined for cracks,

wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration

and replaced if necessary.

Belt routing should also be checked to be sure

there is no interference between the belts and

other parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,

the new belt should be adjusted again after two

or three weeks to eliminate slack resulting from

initial stretching after use.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G200B02A-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

The fuse box for the lights and other electrical

accessories will be found low on the dashboard

on the driver’s side. Inside the box you will find

a list showing the circuits protected by each

fuse.

If any of your car’s lights or other electrical

accessories stop working, a blown fuse could

be the reason. If the fuse has burned out, you

will see that the metal strip inside the fuse has

burned through. If you suspect a blown fuse,

follow this procedure:

HGK4003

CHECKING AND REPLACING

FUSES

G200A01GK-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits from

the battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-

ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (This

could be caused by a short in the system

drawing too much current.) If this ever happens,

have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,

repair the system and replace the fusible link.

The fusible links are located in a relay box(2.0L

)or below the positive (+) post cover of the

battery (2.7L) for easy inspection.

G200A01E

Good

Bad

!CAUTION:

When replacing a fusible link, never use

anything but a new fusible link with the

same or lower amperage rating. Never use

a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.

This could result in serious damage and

create a fire hazard.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

!CAUTION:

A burned-out fuse indicates that there is a

problem in the electrical circuit. If you re-

place a fuse and it blows as soon as the

accessory is turned on, the problem is

serious and should be referred to a Hyundai

dealer for diagnosis and repair. Never re-

place a fuse with anything except a fuse

with the same or a lower amperage rating.

A higher capacity fuse could cause damage

and create a fire hazard.

G200B02L

Good Burned out

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.

2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.

Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you

(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in the

fuse box to simplify this operation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses, even if you

find one that appears to have burned out.

HXDFL1026-1

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new

fuse of the same rating into place. The fuse

should be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse

clip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.

If you do not have a spare fuse, you may be

able to borrow a fuse of the same or lower

rating from an accessory you can tempo-

rarily get along without (the radio or cigarette

lighter, for example). Always remember to

replace the borrowed fuse.

NOTE:

See page 6-39 for the fuse panel descrip-

tions.

CHECKING THE BATTERY

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:

Batteries can be dangerous! When working

with batteries, carefully observe the follow-

ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solution

of sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highly

corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or

the car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,

immediately do the following:

D010B01GK

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

!WARNING:

Always read the following in-

structions carefully when han-

dling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and all

other flames or sparks away from

the battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highly com-

bustible gas, is always present in

battery cells and may explode if

ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach of

children because batteries con-

tain highly corrosive SULFURIC

ACID. Do not allow battery acid

to contact your skin, eyes, cloth-

ing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into your

eyes, flush your eyes with clean

water for at least 15 minutes and

get immediate medical attention.

If possible, continue to apply

water with a sponge or cloth until

medical attention is received.

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush the

affected areas with water for at least 15

minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out your

eyes with water and get medical assistance

as soon as possible. While you are being

driven to get medical assistance, continue to

rinse your eyes by using a sponge or soft

cloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a large

quantity of water or milk followed by milk of

magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetable

oil. Get medical assistance as soon as

possible.

While batteries are being charged (either by a

battery charger or by the vehicle’s generator),

they produce explosive gases. Always ob-

serve these warnings to prevent injuries from

occurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated

area.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking in

the area.

o Keep children away from the area.

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-

sion around the battery posts or terminals

should be removed using a solution of house-

hold baking soda and warm water. After the

battery terminals are dry, cover them with a light

coating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Batteries also contain other chemicals

known to the state of California to cause

cancer. Wash hands after handling.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING

FANS

G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine

coolant temperature and may sometimes

operate even when the engine is not run-

ning. Use extreme caution when working

near the blades of the coolant fan, so that

you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.

As the engine coolant temperature de-

creases the fan will automatically shut off.

This is a normal condition.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,

thoroughly wash the contacted

area.

If you feel a pain or a burning

sensation, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection when charg-

ing or working near a battery.

Always provide ventilation when

working in an enclosed space.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery, ex-

cessive pressure on the case may cause

battery acid to leak, resulting in personal

injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.

o Never attempt to charge the battery when

the battery cables are connected.

o The electrical ignition system works with

high voltage.

Never touch these components with the

engine running or the ignition switched

on.

WARNING:

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser coolant fan should come on

automatically whenever the air conditioning is in

operation.

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-

matically if the engine coolant temperature is

high.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

26 HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290A03GK

G290A03GK-AAT

Low Beam Vertical aiming

Before performing aiming adjustment, make

sure of the following.

G290A04GK

High Beam Vertical aiming

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A03A-AAT

The power steering fluid level should be checked

regularly. To check the power steering fluid

level, be sure the engine is "OFF", then check

to make certain that the power steering fluid

level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level

markings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:

Grinding noise from the power steering

pump may be heard immediately after the

engine is started in extremely cold condi-

tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops during

warm up, there is no abnormal function in

the system. It is due to a power steering

fluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-

tions.

HGK5011

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steer-

ing hose connections for fluid leakage at regular

intervals. The power steering hoses should be

replaced if there is severe surface cracking,

scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hose

could cause premature failure.

Recommended Fluid

Use PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:

Do not start the engine when the power

steering oil reservoir is empty.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G290B01GK-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight Assembly

Replacement

If the vehicle has had front body repair and the

headlight assembly has been replaced, the

headlight aiming should be checked using an

aiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turn

on the headlight switch.

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is

parallel to center line of the body and is

aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the center

of headlights.

G290B01GK

Cut-off line

Ground line

"P"

Horizontal line

Vertical line

0.827 in. (21 mm)

1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.

2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-

eral times. Place vehicle at a distance of 118

in. (3m) from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for

full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and

spare tire, jack, and tools).

4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on the

headlights.

5. Open the hood.

6. Draw the vertical line (through the center of

each headlight beam pattern) and the hori-

zontal line (through the center of each head-

light beam pattern) on the aiming screen.

And then, draw the parallel line at 0.827 in. (21

mm) under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the

parallel line with a phillips screwdriver -

VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:

Never attempt to adjust the horizontal align-

ment of your headlights. Horizontal aiming

must be adjusted by an authorized Hyundai

dealer to avoid incorrect alignment that will

reduce the effectiveness of your headlights.

SPECIFICATION:

"H"

Horizontal center line of headlights from ground:

Low Beam: 26.7 in. (679mm)

High Beam: 26.5 in. (672mm)

"W"

Distance between each headlight center :

Low Beam: 47.3 in. (1,202mm)

High Beam: 38.0 in. (966mm)

"L"

Distance between the headlights and the wall

that the lights are tested against : 118 in. (3,000

mm)

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

HGK5024

5. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwise

and remove it.

6. Disconnect the connector from the bulb

base in the back of the headlight.

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

G260A02A-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be sure

the switch is turned to the "OFF" position.

The next paragraph shows how to reach the

light bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure to

replace the burned-out bulb with one of the

same number and wattage rating.

See page 6-38 for the wattage description.

CAUTION:

Keep the lamps out of contact with petro-

leum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

G270A01GK-AAT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

4. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb

base in the back of the headlight.

HGK5023

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

8. Remove the protective cap from the re-

placement bulb and install the new bulb by

matching the plastic base with the headlight

hole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-

nect the connector.

9. Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-

ly dispose of the old bulb.

10.Check for proper headlight aim.

HGK5027

HGK5026

7. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlight

bulb.

HGK5036

11.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,

remove from the bulb holder and install the

new bulb.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

HGK5041

2. To remove the cover of the rear luggage trim,

turn the knob by hand to the counterclock-

wise.

!WARNING:

This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-

sure and if impacted could shatter, result-

ing in flying fragments. Always wear eye

protection when servicing the bulb. Protect

the bulb against abrasions or scratches

and against liquids when lighted. Turn the

bulb on only when installing in a headlight.

Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.

Keep the bulb out of the reach of children

and dispose of the used bulb with care.

G270A03O

G270B01GK-GAT

Rear Combination Light

(Without woofer speaker)

1. Open the tail gate.

HGK5037

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

5. To replace the rear combination light (stop/

tail light, back-up light, turn signal light, side

mark light), take it out from the bulb holder by

turning it counterclockwise.

(1) Stop/Tail light

(2) Back-up light

(3) Turn signal light

(4) Side mark light

6. Install the new bulb.

HGK5044

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

HGK5042

3. Remove the nut (8mm) with a spanner.

4. To detach the rear combination light hit it

strongly by hand.

HGK5043-1

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2. Take off the luggage board.

HGK5038

G275B01GK-GAT

Rear Combination Light

(With woofer speaker)

HGK5037

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

1. Open the tail gate.

HGK5039

HGK5040

3. Extract the mounting screws (10mm) around

the woofer speaker with a spaner.

4. Disconnect the power cord from the woofer

speaker.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

HGK5044

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

8. To replace the rear combination light (stop/

tail light, back-up light, turn signal light, side

mark light), take it out from the bulb holder by

turning it counterclockwise.

(1) Stop/Tail light

(2) Back-up light

(3) Turn signal light

(4) Side mark light

9. Install the new bulb.

HGK5041

5. To remove the cover of the rear luggae trim,

turn the knob by hand to the counterclock-

wise.

HGK5042

6. Remove the nut (8mm) with a wrench.

HGK5043-1

7. To detach the rear combination light hit it

strongly by hand.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HGK5046

HTB284

G270C01GK-AAT

Luggage Compartment Light

1. Open the tail gate.

2. Remove the cover with a flat-blade screw-

driver.

HGK5045

4. Replace with a new bulb.

G270G01GK-AAT

Map Light

HGK5047

1. Remove the cover with a flat-blade screw-

driver.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

HGK2112

2. Open the glove box and remove the mount-

ing screws on the upside of the glove box.

HGK5048

G270H01GK-GAT

Glove Box Illuminated Light

1. Remove the mounting screws on the down-

side of the glove box.

HGK2111

2. Replace with a new bulb.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

HGK5053

Clip

Power Cord

4. Disconnect the power cord.

5. Remove the glove box illuminated light by

pushing the clip.

3. Remove the glove box by pulling strongly.

CAUTION:

Be careful not to damage the glove box

when pulling the glove box.

HGK5052 HTB284

6. Replace with a new bulb.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Part Name

High Mounted Rear

Stop Light

Rear

Combination

Light

License Plate Light

BULB WATTAGE

G280A04GK-AAT

No.

Part Name

Head Light (High/Low)

Map Light

Front Position Light

Front Fog Light (If installed)

Front Turn Signal Light/ Front Side Marker Light

Front Door Edge Warning Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Wattage

55/55

28/8

No.

Wattage

2.4 (LED)

3.5 (LED)

27/8

HGK5021A

(High) (Low)

Socket type

Px26d/Px26d

W2.1 X 9.5D

W2.1 X 9.5d

P22d

BA15d

W2.1 X 9.5d

S8.5 / 8.5

With spoiler

Without spoiler

Rear Side Marker Light

Turn Signal Light

Stop/Tail Light

Back-up Light

Socket type

W2.1 X 9.5d

BA15s

BA15d

BA15s

W2.1 X 9.5d

S8.5 / 8.5

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

38 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01GK-GAT

Engine Compartment

If installed

NOTE:

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the

fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HGK4005

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Generator(2.0L)

BCM BOX(Tail lamp relay,Power connector,Fuse(2,7,12,13,19,20,24)

Condenser fan relay

Radiator fan relay

Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay, A/T control relay,

Generator,ECM(Z2.7L),PCM(2.0L)

Ignition switch,Start relay

ABS/ESP control module,ESP Air bleeding connector

Blower relay

Injector

Oxygen sensor,Camshaft position sensor, Idle speed control actuator

DRL control module

Front fog lamp relay

TCM(2.7L),ECM(2.7L)

Horn relay,A/C relay

Head lamp relay(High)

Head lamp relay(Low)

FUSERATING

120A

50A

30A

40A

30A

15A

10A

15A

10A

15A

DESCRIPTION

BATT

COND

RAD

ECU

IGN

ABS 1

ABS 2

BLOWER

INJ

SNSR

DRL

F/FOG

ECU

HORN,A/CON

H/LP (HI)

H/LP (LO)

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

G200D02GK-GAT

Inner Panel

HGK204-E

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

DESCRIPTION

IG COIL

AMP

B/UP LAMP

A/BAG IND

A/BAG

HTD MIR

HAZARD

R/WIPER

TAIL-RH

F/WIPER

A/C SW

RR DEFOG

STOP

TAIL-LH

A/CON

ECU

CLUSTER

ROOM LP

P/WINDOW

T/GATE

IGN

RR FOG

C/LIGHT

S/ROOF

S/HTR

ABS

AUDIO

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Ignition coil(2.7L), Electronic chrome mirror

AMP

Back-up lamp switch,Transaxle range switch,Cruise control module,Stop lamp switch

Instrument cluster (A/BAG IND.)

SRS control module

Mirror defogger

Hazard relay

Rear wiper motor,Rear intermittent wiper relay

Right tail lamps,Glove box lamp

Front wiper motor,Front wiper relay

Blower relay,Blower motor

Defogger relay

Stop lamp switch,Burglar alarm horn relay,Folding/Unfolding rely

Left tail lamps

A/C control module, Blower relay

ECM, Multi gauge unit, TCM, Vehicle speed sensor

Instrument cluster (Power), Per-excitation resister, DRL Control module,Generator

Room lamp,Clock,Audio,Data link connector,Multi gauge unit

Power window relay

Trunk lid switch

AQS sensor,Head lamp relay,DRL Control module

Rear fog lamp

Cigarette lighter,Outside mirror switch

Sunroof,Power door lock/Unlock relay

Seat warmer

ESP/ABS control module

Audio,Digital clock

FUSERATING

20A

10A

15A

10A

15A

10A

20A

10A

30A

15A

10A

30A

15A

10A

15A

20A

10A

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2

Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a

highly effective system which controls exhaust

emissions while maintaining good vehicle per-

formance.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control

System

The Positive Crankcase Ventilation System is

employed to prevent air pollution caused by

blow-by gases being emitted from the crank-

case. This system supplies fresh filtered air to

the crankcase through the air intake hose.

Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with

blow-by gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve and into the induction system.

H010A02GK-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emission

control system to meet all requirements of the

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-

fornia Air Resources Board.

There are three emission control systems which

are as follows.

1) Crankcase Emission Control System

2) Evaporative Emission Control System

3) Exhaust Emission Control System

In order to ensure the proper function of the

emission control systems, it is recommended

that you have your car inspected and main-

tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-

cordance with the maintenance schedule in this

manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance

Test (Vehicle with Electronic Stability Pro-

gram)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiring

during dynamometer testing, discon-

nect the ABS connector located inside

of the wheel guard (driver side).

o For more information, see shop manual

(BR Group, Wheel Speed Sensor).

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are

absorbed and stored in the onboard canister.

When the engine is running, the fuel vapors

absorbed in the canister are drawn into the

induction system through the purge control

solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled

by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the

engine coolant temperature is low during idling,

the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not

taken into the engine. After the engine warms-

up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to

introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-

ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System is

designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping

into the atmosphere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow the

vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a

canister while refueling at the gas station, pre-

venting the escape of fuel vapors into the

atmosphere.)

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-

lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-

duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and

nitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.

Exhaust gases passing through the catalytic

converter may cause it to operate at a very high

temperature. The introduction of large amounts

of unburned gasoline into the exhaust may

cause the catalytic converter to overheat and

create a fire hazard. This risk may be reduced

by observing the following:

HGK5061

Catalytic Converter

(California)

Catalytic Converter

(Federal, California)

!WARNING:

o Use unleaded fuel only.

o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-

verter temperatures can result from im-

proper operation of the electrical, igni-

tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-

tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or is

hard to start, have your Hyundai dealer

inspect and repair the problem as soon

as possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.

Running out of gasoline may cause the

engine to misfire and result in damage to

the catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periods

longer than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed or

pulled to get started. This may cause the

catalytic converter to overheat and cre-

ate a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converter or

any other part of the exhaust system

while the catalytic converter is hot. Shut

off the engine, wait for at least one hour

before touching the catalytic converter

or any other part of the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is

your best source of assistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-

bustible material such as grass, paper,

leaves or rags. These materials might

contact the hot catalytic converter and a

fire might result.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2

Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2

Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3

Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5

Tire Terminology and Definitions................................... 8-7

Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-9

Tire Chains.................................................................. 8-10

Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-10

Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-11

Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11

When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-12

Spare Tire and Tools................................................... 8-13

Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-13

Consumer Information................................................. 8-13

Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-16

Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-16

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING

SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2ENGINE NUMBER

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01A-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the

number used in registering your car and in all

legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. It

can be found in three different places on your

car:

1. On the bulkhead between the engine and

passenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panel

where it can be seen by looking down through

the windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillar outer

panel.

The engine number is stamped on the engine

block as shown in the drawing.

HGK220A

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundai

are chosen to provide the best perfor-

mance for normal driving.

If you ever have questions about your

tire warranty and where to obtain ser-

vice, see the tire manufacture's booklet

included with your vehicle's Owner's

Manual Literature Kit.

I010B01B

2.7L

HFO6003

2.0L

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

I030A03JM-AAT

RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-

TION PRESSURES

Tire label located on the driver's side of

the center pillar outer panel gives the

cold tire pressures recommended for

your vehicle with the original tire size,

the number of people that can be in your

vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

These pressures were chosen to pro-

vide the most satisfactory combination

of ride comfort, tire wear and stability

under normal conditions. Tire pressures

should be checked at least monthly.

Proper tire inflation pressures should

be maintained for these reasons:

I030B01GK

HGK6003

!WARNING:

o Inspect your tires frequently for

proper inflation as well as wear

and damage. Always use a tire

pressure gauge.

o Tires with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly causing

poor handling, loss of vehicle

control, and sudden tire failure

leading to accidents, injuries, and

even death. The recommended

cold tire pressure for your vehicle

can be found in this manual and

on the tire label located on the

driver's side of the center pillar.

o Worn tires can cause accidents.

Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.

o Remember to check the pressure

of your spare tire. Hyundai recom-

mends that you check the spare

every time you check the pressure

of the other tires on your vehicle.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

NOTE:

o Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling and

reduced fuel economy. Wheel de-

formation also is possible. Keep

your tire pressures at the proper

levels. If a tire frequently needs

refilling, have it checked by your

Hyundai Dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harsh

ride, excessive wear at the center

of the tire tread, and a greater

possibility of damage from road

hazards.

WARNING:

Overinflation or underinflation can

reduce the tire life, adversely affect

vehicle handling, and lead to sud-

den tire failure. This could rusult in

loss of vehicle control and potential

injury.

CAUTION:

Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tires

are cold. (After the vehicle has

been parked for at least three hours

or hasn't been driven more than 1

mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)

o Check the pressure of your spare

tire each time you check the pres-

sure of other tires.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-

dents. If your tread is badly worn,

or if your tires have been dam-

aged, replace them.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

label, no further adjustment is neces-

sary. If the pressure is low, add air until

you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the center

of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-

sure with the tire gage. Be sure to put

the valve caps back on the valve stems.

They help prevent leaks by keeping out

dirt and moisture.

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-

SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the

spare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gage to check tire

pressure. You can not tell if your tires

are properly inflated simply by looking

at them. Radial tires may look properly

inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure when

the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your

vehicle has been sitting for at least

three hours or driven no more than 1

mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly

onto the valve to get a pressure mea-

surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-

sure matches the recommended pres-

sure on the tire and loading information

Federal law requires tire manufacturers

to place standardized information on

the sidewall of all tires. This information

identifies and describes the fundamen-

tal characteristics of the tire and also

provides the tire identification number

(TIN) for safety standard certification.

The TIN can be used to identify the tire

in case of a recall.

I030B01GK-GAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

5, 6

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

1. Manufacturer or Brand name

o Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

2. Tire size

(example: P215/45R17 87V)

o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.

A "T" is the designation for a tem-

porary spare tire.

o Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters

of the tire from sidewall edge to

sidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (45): This num-

ber, known as the aspect ratio,

gives the tire's ratio of height to

width.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.

o Two-digit number (17): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter in

inches.

o Two digit number (87): This num-

ber is the tire's load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support.

o V: Speed Rating. The speed rating

denotes the speed at which a tire is

designed to be driven for extended

periods of time. The ratings range

from "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-

bol can be placed above, below or

to the left or right of the Tire Iden

tification Number. Indicates tire is

in compliance with the U.S. De-

partment of Transportation Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's

identification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire size

o 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For

example, the numbers 3105 means

the 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which in-

clude steel, nylon, polyester, and

others. The letter "R" means radial

ply construction; the letter "D" means

diagonal or bias ply construction;

and the letter "B" means belted-bias

ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation pres-

sure.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG):

Tire manufacturers are required to

grade tires based on three perfor-

mance factors: treadwear, traction

and temperature resistance. For more

information, see Uniform Tire Qual-

ity Grading on page 8-14.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-

TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside

the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air

pressure is expressed in pounds per

square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the

combined weight of optional accesso-

ries. Some examples of optional ac-

cessories are, automatic transmission,

power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a

tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that

is located between the plies and the

tread. Cords may be made from steel or

other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel

wires wrapped by steel cords that hold

the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which

the plies are laid at alternate angles

less than 90 degrees to the centerline of

the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air

pressure in a tire, measured in pounds

per square inch (psi) or kilopascals

(kPa) before a tire has built up heat from

driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of

a motor vehicle with standard and op-

tional equipment including the maxi-

mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,

but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the

sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire

is in compliance with the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation motor vehicle

safety standards. The DOT code in-

cludes the Tire Identification Number

(TIN), an alphanumeric designator which

can also identify the tire manufacturer,

production plant, brand and date of

production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating

for the front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating

for the rear axle.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side

of an asymmetrical tire, that must al-

ways face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for

air pressure.

Load Index: An assigned number rang-

ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds to

the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The

maximum air pressure to which a cold

tire may be inflated. The maximum air

pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-

ing for a tire at the maximum permis-

sible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The num-

ber of occupants a vehicle is designed

to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68

kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designated

seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of

a asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that faces outward when mounted

on a vehicle. The side of the tire that

contains a whitewall, bears white letter-

ing or bears manufacturer, brand and or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on the

other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used

on passenger cars and some light duty

trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended

tire inflation pressure and shown on the

tire placard.

Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the ply cords that extend to the

beads are laid at 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon

which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between

the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code

assigned to a tire indicating the maxi-

mum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire

and the road surface. The amount of

grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes

into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,

sometimes called "wear bars," that show

across the tread of a tire when only 2/32

inch of tread remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards, a tire information system

that provides consumers with ratings

for a tire's traction, temperature and

treadwear. Ratings are determined by

tire manufacturers using government

testing procedures. The ratings are

molded into the sidewall of the tire.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

I040A01S-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,

they should be the same size and have

the same load capacity as the original

tires. Snow tires should be installed on

all four wheels; otherwise, poor han-

dling may result.

Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)

more air pressure than the pressure

recommended for the standard tires on

the tire label on the driver side center

pillar outer panel or up to the maximum

pressure shown on the tire sidewall

whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120

km/h) when your car is equipped with

snow tires.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number

of designated seating positions multi-

plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated

cargo and luggage load

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:

Load on an individual tire due to curb

and accessory weight plus maximum

occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

That load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the curb weight, accessory

weight, and normal occupant weight

and driving by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently

attached to a vehicle showing the origi-

nal equipment tire size and recom-

mended inflation pressure

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires on

some models to provide good perfor-

mance for use all year round, including

snowy and icy road conditions. All sea-

son tires are identified by ALL SEASON

and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than all season tires an may be

more appropriate in some areas.

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES

Hyundai specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance

is substantrally reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire trac-

tion rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the

tire side wall. if you plan to operate your

vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.

Hyundai recommends the use of snow

tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

I060A02GK-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 6,000

miles (10,000 km). If you notice that

tires are wearing unevenly between ro-

tations, have the car checked by a

Hyundai dealer so the cause may be

corrected.

After rotating, adjust the tire pressures

and be sure to check wheel nut torque.

HGK5016

I050A04GK-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should be

installed on the front wheels. Be sure

that the chains are installed in accor-

dance with the manufacturer's instruc-

tions. Refer to the following informa-

tion.

WARNING:

o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than

20 mph.

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &

plastic chains.

o Don't use a tire chains on a vehicle

equipped with aluminium wheels.

If it is unavoidable use wire-type

chains.

o Use tire chains less than 0.39 in.

(10 mm) for "16, and "17 tires.

o If you have noise caused by chains

contacting the body, retighten the

chain to avoid contact with the

vehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retighten

the chains after driving 0.3~0.6

miles.

Tire size

205/55 R 16

215/45 R 17

Snow Chain

Thickness

Max. 0.39 in. (10 mm)

16" Tire 17" Tire

To minimize tire and chain wear, do not

continue to use tire chains when they

are no longer needed.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affect

handling and tire wear. The tires on your

Hyundai were balanced before the car

was delivered but may need balancing

again during the years you own the car.

Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-

pair, it should be rebalanced before

being reinstalled on the car.

!WARNING:

o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.

o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.

This may cause unusual handling

characteristics that could result in

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

!WARNING:

When rotating the 215/45 R17 tires,

the tires must be mount following

the "ROTATION" direction marked

on the sidewall of the tires.

If rotating the tires from the left side

to the right side and from the right

side to the left side, separate the

wheel from the tire and then remount

them.

Sidewall

HGK5018

Tire rotation

direction

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive

on worn tires, tires that are improperly

inflated or on slippery road surfaces.

Tires should be replaced when tread

wear indicators appear. To reduce the

possibility of losing control, slow down

whenever there is rain, snow or ice on

the road.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

I090A04A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

HGK5015

TWI indicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm) WARNING:

To reduce the chance or serious or

fatal injuries from an accident caused

by tire failure or loss of vehicle con-

trol:

o Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.

Worn tires can cause loss of brak-

ing effectiveness, steering con-

trol, and traction.

o Do not drive your vehicle with too

little or too much pressure in your

tires. This can lead to uneven

wear and tire failure.

o When replacing tires, never mix

radial and bias-ply tires on the

same car. You must replace all

tires (including the spare) if mov-

ing from radial to bias-ply tires.

The original tires on your car have tread

wear indicators. The location of tread

wear indicators is shown by the "TWI"

or " " marks, etc., The tread wear

indicators appear when the tread depth

is 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should be

replaced when these appear as a solid

bar across two or more grooves of the

tread. Always replace your tires with

those of the recommended size. If you

change wheels, the new wheel's rim

width and offset must meet Hyundai

specification.

o Using tires and wheel other than

the recommended sizes could

cause unusual handling charac-

teristics and poor vehicle control,

resulting in a serious accident.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's

specifications may fit poorly and

result in damage to the vehicle or

unusual handling and poor ve-

hicle control.

WARNING:

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

CONSUMER INFORMATIONSPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from your

authorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-

fessional technicians, but is simple enough for

most mechanically-inclined owners to under-

stand.

I100A02Y-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-

lowing:

Spare tire and wheel

Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar

Jack

HGK4008

I120A03A-AAT

Please consult your Owner's Handbook &

Warranty Information booklet for your

vehicle's specific warranty coverage.

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been prepared

in accordance with regulations issued by the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It

provides the purchasers and/or prospective

purchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-

mation on uniform tire quality grading. Your

Hyundai dealer will help answer any questions

you may have as you read this information.

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI

VEHICLE

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

I130B04A-AAT

Uniform tire quality grading

Department of Transportation quality

grades - All passenger vehicle tires

must conform to Federal Safety Stan-

dards in addition to these grades. These

quality grades are molded on the

sidewall.

Treadwear - The tread wear grade is a

comparative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a

tire graded 150 would wear one and a

half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to varia-

tions in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road character-

istics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction

grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,

A, B, and C. Those grades represent

the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction per-

formance.

WARNING:

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not in-

clude acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-

ture grades are A (the highest), B, and

C, representing the tire's resistance to

the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when tested

under controlled conditions on a speci-

fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-

ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires

must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test

wheel than the minimum required by

law.

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

I130D04A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-

factured to meet or exceed all applicable safety

standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you

to read and follow all directions in this Owner's

Manual, particularly the information under the

headings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-

ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any

questions regarding the operation of your ve-

hicle, please contact your nearest Hyundai

Motor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine,

Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,

New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina, Rhode

Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region

1100 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831

(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, North Caro-

lina, South Carolina.

Southern Region

270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A

Austell, GA 30168

(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas,

Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Mis-

souri, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,

Texas, Wyoming.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019

(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Ken-

tucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North

Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin.

Central Region

1705 Sequoia Drive

Aurora, Illinois 60506

(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,

California, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon,

Texas, Utah, Washington.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue

P.O.Box 20850

Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Exces-

sive speed, underinflation, or exces-

sive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup

and possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-

ity grades can be found on the tire

sidewall between the tread shoulder

and the maximum section width.

For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

16 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C02A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. If

NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in in-

dividual problems between you, your

dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR

AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Sev-

enth Street, SW., Washington, DC

20590. You can also obtain other infor-

mation about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may have

related to your vehicle's warranty or the

duties contemplated under the warranty,

including claims related to the refund or

partial refund of your vehicle's purchase

price (excluding personal injury or prod-

uct liability claims), shall be resolved

by binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-

tion shall be administered by and through

the National Arbitration Forum (NAF) or

the American Arbitration Association

(AAA), under the Code of Procedure of

the entity you select.

You will not be responsible for paying

filing and hearing fees above $275.00.

All other arbitration costs shall be borne

by Hyundai Motor America. You are not

responsible to pay any of the costs

Hyundai incurs.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall

not deprive you of any remedies avail-

able to you under applicable law. The

parties are waiving their right to seek

remedies in court, including the right to

a jury trial.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall

be governed by and interpreted

under the Federal Arbitration Act, 9

U.S.C. sections 1-16. Judgment upon

any award may be entered in any court

having jurisdiction.

You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-

ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-

tronic notice. Written notice must be

delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai

Motor America, Attn: Consumer Af-

fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box

20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.

Electronic notice must be submitted at

the following website address :

http://warranty-arbitration.

hyundaiUSA.com. Notice must be re-

ceived within 90 days after you pur-

chase your vehicle.

BINDING ARBITRATION

(U.S.A only)

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2

Engine ........................................................................... 9-3

Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

J050A01GK-GAT

BRAKE

J040A03GK-GET

ELECTRICAL

J030A01GK-AAT

TIRE

J060A01F-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01GK-AAT

POWER STEERING

J010A01GK-AAT

MEASUREMENT

173(4395)

69.3(1760)

52.4(1330)

99.6(2530)

58.7(1490)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height (unladen)

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in.(0 ~ 30 mm)

5.20 in.(132 mm)

Vane type

Liter

Fuel tank capacity

Option 205/55 R16, 215/45 R17

Item

Battery

Alternator

US.gal

14.5

in.(mm)

Imp.gal

J035A01GK-GAT

SPARE TIRE

Standard T125/70 R16 (Temporary)

2.0L

MF 68AH

90A

2.7L

MF 68AH

120A

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid Disc

Cable

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2.0 L

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC CVVT

82 x 93.5

1,975

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.(0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.(0.25 ~ 0.31 mm )

0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.(0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)

0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.(0.2 ~ 0.38 mm)

700 ± 100

BTDC 8° ± 5°

SPECIFICATION

2.7 L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

86.7 x 75

2,656

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

AUTO LASH

750 ± 100

BTDC 12° ± 10°

ENGINE

J070A05GK-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke (mm)

Displacement (cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance

(Cold Engine : 20 ± 5°C)

Idle speed (RPM)

Ignition timing (Base)

For adjusting

For checking

Intake

Exhaust

Intake

Exhaust

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

Oil & Grease Standard

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III,

SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved

by Hundai Motor Co..

PSF-3

DOT 3 or DOT 4 equivalent

Ethylene glycol base for aluminium radiator

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A05GK-AAT

API SJ,SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F(-18°C)]

Item

Engine Oil

Recommends

Transaxle

Power Steering

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Coolant

Manual

Auto

Q'ty (u.s.qts.) (liter, Imp. qts.)

(Drain and refill)

Engine Oil (with oil filter):

2.0 L :4.2 (4.0, 3.5)

2.7L : 4.76 (4.5, 4.0)

5 speed : 2.27 (2.15, 1.86), 6 speed : 2.32 (2.2, 1.94)

8.2 (7.8, 6.9)

As required

2.0L : 7.4 (7.0, 6.2) 2.7L : 8.5 (8.0, 7.0)

INDEX

10 INDEX

Air Bag ............................................................................................... 1-28

Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-10

Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-17

Operation ...................................................................................... 6-17

Switch ........................................................................................... 1-77

Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-127

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................................................2-12

Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-54

Automatic Transaxle ........................................................................... 2-8

Auto Remote Control Switch ............................................................. 1-70

Battery ..................................................................................... 2-17, 6-23

Binding arbitration ..............................................................................8-16

Brake

Anti-lock system .......................................................................... 2-12

Checking the brakes .................................................................... 6-15

Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-15

Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-21

Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-20

Practices ...................................................................................... 2-12

Breaking-In your new Hyundai ...........................................................1-3

Bulbs Wattage ................................................................................... 6-37

Care of Cassette tapes .................................................................. 1-125

Care of Disc ................................................................................... 1-125

Cassette Tape Player Operation

(H250, H280, J290) ............................................. 1-93, 1-107, 1-118

Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3

CD Auto Changer (H260, H280, J290) .................. 1-101, 1-112, 1-120

Child Restraint System ......................................................... 1-21 ~ 1-26

Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................ 1-53

Climate Control Air Filter ................................................................... 1-86

Clutch

Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-16

Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-20

Combination Light

Auto Light ...................................................................................... 1-48

Headlight flasher .......................................................................... 1-49

Headlight switch ...........................................................................1-48

High-beam switch ........................................................................ 1-48

Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-47

Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-47

Compact Disc Player Operation

(H260, H280, J290) ............................................. 1-98, 1-109, 1-120

Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-13

Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-25

Corrosion Protection

Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5

Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2

Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3

Cruise Control ................................................................................... 1-67

INDEX

Defrosting/Defogging ........................................................................ 1-79

Door

Central door lock ............................................................................ 1-6

Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4

Front door edge warning light ...................................................... 1-61

Locking, unlocking front door with a key ...................................... 1-5

Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-54

Drive Belts .............................................................................. 6-18, 6-21

Driving

Economical driving ....................................................................... 2-15

Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-16

Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-16

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ................................................... 2-13

Emissions Control Systems ............................................................... 7-1

Engine

Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-3

Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2

Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-7

Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-42

If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4

Number ........................................................................................... 8-2

Oil ................................................................................................... 6-5

Starting ........................................................................................... 2-5

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous .................................................. 2-2

Floor mat Anchor ..............................................................................1-66

Front Fog Light Switch ...................................................................... 1-51

Front Seats

Adjustable front seats ..................................................................1-10

Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-12

Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-11

Adjusting seat forward and rearward .......................................... 1-11

Lumbar support control ............................................................... 1-13

Seat cushion height adjustment .................................................. 1-13

Fuel

Capacity .........................................................................................9-2

Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-42

Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler Lid

Remote release ............................................................................ 1-62

Fuses

Fuse Panel Description ...............................................................6-38

General Everyday Checks .................................................................6-4

Glove box .......................................................................................... 1-58

Hazard Warning System ..................................................................1-52

Headlight Aiming Adjustment ............................................................6-26

Headlight Bulb .................................................................................... 6-28

10 INDEX

Heating and cooling control

Rotary Type ................................................................................. 1-71

Automatic Type ............................................................................ 1-80

High-mounted Rear Stop light ...........................................................1-61

Hood Release .................................................................................... 1-61

Horn ................................................................................................. 1-66

Ignition Switch ...................................................................................... 2-3

Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-36

Intermittent Wiper ..............................................................................1-50

Jump Starting ...................................................................................... 3-3

Keys ................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-14

Positions .........................................................................................2-3

Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 9-4

Luggage Net ......................................................................................1-66

Maintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7

Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6

Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4

Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2

Map Light ........................................................................................... 1-57

Mirror

Day-night inside rearview ............................................................ 1-59

Outside rear view ......................................................................... 1-58

Odometer ..........................................................................................1-43

Parking Brake .................................................................................... 1-60

Power Steering Fluid Level ...............................................................6-26

Power Window .................................................................................... 1-9

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt .....................................................................1-26

Radio (H250, H260, H280, J290) .................... 1-90, 1-95, 1-104, 1-115

Rear Seats

Before folding the rear seats .......................................................1-14

Fold down ..................................................................................... 1-15

Rear seat entry ............................................................................ 1-14

Rear seat positions ...................................................................... 1-13

Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-52

Reporting Safety Defects ................................................................. 8-16

INDEX

Seat Belts

3-Point system ............................................................................. 1-19

Adjustable height .......................................................................... 1-18

Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-20

Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-17

Precautions .................................................................................. 1-16

Spark Plugs ....................................................................................... 6-10

Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-42

Starting Procedures ............................................................................ 2-5

Steering Wheel

Free-play ...................................................................................... 6-20

Tilt lever ........................................................................................ 1-65

Stereo Radio Operation

(H250, H260, H280, J290) ......................... 1-90, 1-95, 1-104, 1-115

Stereo Sound System .......................................................................1-88

Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-65

Sunglass Holder ................................................................................ 1-57

Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-55

Tachometer .......................................................................................1-43

Tail Gate ............................................................................................ 1-63

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch .........................................1-51

Theft-alarm System ............................................................................ 1-6

Tires

All season tires ............................................................................... 8-9

Balancing ...................................................................................... 8-11

Chains ..........................................................................................8-10

Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-7

If you have a flat tire ....................................................................... 3-6

Information ......................................................................................8-2

Pressure .........................................................................................8-3

Replacement ................................................................................ 8-12

Rotation ........................................................................................ 8-10

Sidewall labeling .............................................................................8-4

Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-9

Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5

Summer tires .................................................................................. 8-9

Terminology and definitions ........................................................... 8-7

Traction ........................................................................................ 8-12

Towing

A trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-19

Emergency ................................................................................... 3-13

If your vehicle must be towed ...................................................... 3-12

10 INDEX

Transaxle

Automatic ........................................................................................ 2-8

Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-13

Manual ............................................................................................2-6

Manual transaxle oil checking ..................................................... 6-12

Trip Computer ................................................................................... 1-44

Trip Odometer ................................................................................... 1-43

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................................................... 8-2

Vehicle Load Limit .............................................................................2-22

Vehicle Specification ........................................................................... 9-1

Ventilation

Center ventilator ...........................................................................1-71

Side ventilator ............................................................................... 1-71

Warning Lights .................................................................................. 1-38

Warranties for Your Hyundai ............................................................ 8-12

Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-49

Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................................. 6-10

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

gkflhma-0.p65 9/12/2006, 3:13 PM13

Seoul Korea

Printing: MAY. 29, 2006

Publication No.: A2CO-EU65I

Printed in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

FUEL:

UNLEADED gasoline only

Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

Original, U.S.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 14.5 (12, 55)

TIRE PRESSURE:

See the label on the driver side center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:

See pages 8-2 through 8-15.

HOOD RELEASE:

Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:

API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel

efficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperatures

are above 0°F (-18°C). See page 6-5 or 9-4.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil level

should be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:

Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector lever

through all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then check the level

of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,

DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP

III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

QUICK INDEX

o Car will not start ........................................................................ 3-2

o Flat tire ...................................................................................... 3-6

o Warning light/chime comes on ...................................... 1-36 ~ 1-39

o Engine overheats ....................................................................... 3-4

o Towing of your vehicle ............................................................. 3-11

o Starting the engine ..................................................................... 2-4

o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ............................ 1-3

o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................. 5-4

o Reporting safety defects .......................................................... 8-16

Hyundai 2006 Tiburon Owners Manual Gkflhma 11.p65

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation